- Computers & electronics
- Audio & home theatre
- CD players
- JVC
- KD SH1000 - Radio / CD
- Instructions manual
JVC KD SH1000 - Radio / CD Instructions Manual
Add to My manuals282 Pages
JVC KD SH1000 - Radio / CD is a powerful and versatile car audio system that offers a wide range of features to enhance your listening experience. With its built-in CD player or external CD Changer connectivity, you can enjoy your favorite music on the go. It also supports playback from SD cards and USB memory devices, giving you even more options for music playback. The JVC KD SH1000 also includes a built-in AM/FM tuner, so you can stay up-to-date on the latest news and music. And with its powerful 50 watts x 4 channel amplifier, you'll enjoy crystal-clear sound even at high volumes.
advertisement
CD RECEIVER
RECEPTOR CON CD
RECEPTEUR CD
KD-SH1000
KD-SH1000
KD-SH1000
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8
Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 8
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
INSTRUCTIONS
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
For customer Use:
Enter below the Model
No. and Serial No. which are located on the top or bottom of the cabinet.
Retain this information for future reference.
Model No.
Serial No.
GET0364-001A
[J]
2
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
TV technician for help.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
Notice:
The display window built in this unit has been produced with high precision, but it may have some ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not malfunction.
How to reset your unit
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card first (see page 11).
1
Caution:
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION:
Do not open the top cover.
There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3.
CAUTION:
Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
•
If this does not work, reset your unit.
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in
“More about this unit” (see pages 32 – 37).
Press briefly.
Press repeatedly.
Press either one.
Press
A
, then
B
.
Press and hold until your desired response begins.
Press and hold both buttons at the same time.
The following marks are used to indicate...
: Built-in CD player operations.
: External CD changer operations.
: SD player operations.
: External USB memory operations.
CONTENTS
Control panel ................................... 5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
............ 6
Getting started ................................. 7
Basic operations ............................................... 7
Radio operations .............................. 8
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations .................................... 11
Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 11
Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 11
Playing from an SD card .................................... 11
Playing from a USB memory ............................. 12
Sound adjustments ........................... 15
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 15
Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 16
Activating crossover network ........................... 18
Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 18
General settings — PSM ................... 20
Title assignment .............................. 24
Satellite radio operations ................. 25 iPod®/D. player operations ................ 29
Other external component operations ... 31
Maintenance .................................... 31
More about this unit ......................... 32
Troubleshooting ............................... 38
Specifications ................................... 42
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.
3
4
How to detach/attach the control panel
Detaching...
How to enter the various menus
The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,
PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).
• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds, menu screen is canceled.
1
2
Select a menu you want.
Attaching...
Time countdown indicator
3
Enter the selected menu.
How to change the control panel angle
• To go back to the previous screen or exit the MENU screen, press BACK repeatedly.
4
Operate as instructed on the screen.
• To go back to the MENU screen, press
MENU.
When using the remote controller
Caution:
How to change the display information and patterns
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
Source operation display Clock time display
Large graphic display (full display size) Small graphic display
Control panel
Parts identification
1
BAND button
2
SOURCE button
3
• Control dial
• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER button
4
MENU button
5
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
6
Display window
7
DISP (display) button
8
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
9
(angle) button p
0
(eject) button q
4
/
¢
buttons w
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
e
BACK button r
Reset button t
(control panel release) button
5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
Caution:
6
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.
Main elements and features
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
2
SOURCE button
Selects the source.
3
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Changes the preset stations.
•
For SIRIUS
®
/XM:
Changes the categories.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the folders.
•
While listening to an Apple iPod
®
or a
JVC D. player:
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
∞
.
– Enters the main menu with
5
.
(Now
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
work as the menu selecting buttons.) *
4
VOL (volume) + / – buttons
Adjusts the volume level.
5
Number buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Selects the preset station if pressed, or store a station if pressed and held.
•
For SIRIUS
®
/XM:
Selects the preset channels if pressed, or store a channel if pressed and held.
•
For CD/CD Text:
Selects the tracks.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Selects the folders.
•
For CD changer:
Selects the discs.
6
ANGLE button
Adjusts the control panel angle.
7
BAND button
Selects the band.
8
4
/
¢
buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Searches for stations if pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed and held.
• For SIRIUS
®
/XM:
Changes the channels if pressed briefly, or changes the channels rapidly if pressed and held.
•
For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the tracks if pressed, or fastforwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.
•
While listening to an iPod or a D. player
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
∞
to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
*
5
:
Returns to the previous menu.
∞
:
Confirms the selection.
Getting started
Activates or deactivates crossover network
(see page 18) before turning on the power.
Basic operations
~
Turn on the power.
Ÿ
FM/AM
=
SIRIUS
*
/XM
*
=
CD
*
=
SD
*
=
USB
*
=
CD-CH
* /
iPod
* /
D. player
*
(or
EXT-IN
)
=
LINE-IN
=
(back to the beginning)
!
*
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.
For FM/AM tuner
For SIRIUS
®
radio
For XM tuner
⁄
Adjust the volume.
Continued on the next page
7
8
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press it again.
To turn off the power
3
Finish the procedure.
To check the current clock time while the power is turned off
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
20 – 23.
1
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
2
Radio operations
~
Ÿ
!
Start searching for a station.
Selected band appears.
1
Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “Demo,” then “Off.”
2
Setting the clock
Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust the minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or
“12Hours.”
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching,
press the same button again.
To tune in to a station manually
In step
!
above...
1
2
Select a desired station frequency.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
3
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.
FM station automatic presetting —
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to store into.
4
MO indicator lights up.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
2
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
To restore the stereo effect,
repeat the same procedure and select “Off” in step
3
. The MO indicator goes off.
4
Tuning in to FM stations with strong signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-
Extreme)
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
3
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
1
4
DX indicator goes off and LO indicator lights up.
Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be detected.
To tune in to all receivable stations,
repeat the same procedure and select “DX” in step
3
. The
LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights up.
2
3
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
• If you hold down
5
/
∞
, the Preset Station
List appears (go to step
6
).
Continued on the next page
9
10
4
5
2
1
Listening to a preset station
6
Select a preset number.
• You can move to the lists of the other FM bands by turning the control dial.
7
Store the station.
When using the remote controller
Directly select the preset number.
When using the remote controller
After tuning in to a station you want to preset...
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Playing from an SD card
Before detaching the control panel, turn off the power.
~
Ÿ
SD loading slot
To stop play and eject the disc
Note:
If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB” flashes on the display. If this happens, detach the USB memory, then, press
0
button again.
Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
*
If you have changed the external input setting to “Ext In” (see page 22), you cannot select the
CD changer.
SD card
Press in the SD card until you hear a clicking sound.
To eject the SD card,
press the SD card again.
• Press the SD card softly (do not release your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD card may pop out from the unit.
Continued on the next page
11
12
!
Attach the control panel.
Cautions:
• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory when it might hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all important data have been backed up to avoid losing the data.
⁄
• The control panel goes back to the previous position.
If an SD card or USB memory has been attached...
Playback starts automatically if tracks are recorded.
Playing from a USB memory
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a
USB memory.
All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.
~
Ÿ
USB input terminal
Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
• If a different SD card or USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.
About MP3 and WMA tracks
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
To fast-forward or reverse the track
USB memory
To detach the USB memory,
straightly pull it out from the unit.
To go to the next or previous tracks
4
Confirm the selection.
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3/WMA/SD/USB)
For MP3 tracks:
For WMA tracks:
The selected list appears on the display.
• You can move to the other list by turning the control dial.
5
Select a disc/folder/file from the list.
Current folder
• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List
( ) and Folder List ( / /
), see the following.
Ex.: When “Folder” is selected in step
3
Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
If you select the current disc/folder
(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File
List appears.
6
Starts playback.
Other main functions
Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list
• This function is not available for an audio CD or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
When using the remote controller
• To directly select a disc ( )
• To directly select a track of an audio CD or a CD Text ( )
• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder
( / / )
To select a number from 1 – 6:
3
Select a list type.
To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):
*
1
Selectable only when the source is
“CD-CH.”
*
2
Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.
For MP3/WMA folders:
It is required that folders are assigned with
2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.
13
14
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
1
2
After making sure “No Eject?” is selected...
• “No Eject” flashes, and the disc cannot be ejected.
To cancel the prohibition,
repeat the same procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is selected.
• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
3
Select one of the items (see the following table)
.
Intro Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...
Track
: All tracks of the current playback media. [ ]
Folder
*
1
: First track of all folders of the current playback media. [ ]
Disc
* 2 : First track of all the inserted discs.
Off
[
: Cancels.
]
Repeat Plays repeatedly
Track
: The current track. [ ]
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder.
[ ]
Disc
* 2 : All tracks of the inserted discs.
[ ]
Off
: Cancels.
Random Plays at random
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folder and so on.
Disc
All
Off
*
3
[ ]
: All tracks of the current disc.
[ ]
: All tracks of the inserted discs/ media. [
: Cancels.
]
*
1
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/
USB).
* 2
Only when the source is CD-CH.
*
3
Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.
4
Finish the procedure.
Sound adjustments
To make more precise settings,
see the following.
To cancel the acoustic effect,
select “Defeat” in step
Ÿ
.
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
You can create a more acoustic sound field such as in a theater, hall, etc.
• When crossover network (see page 18) is activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”
DSP modes
Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,
Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—
Karaoke.)
Precise settings for the DSP modes
1
Select a DSP mode.
2
Select the number of the built-in speakers.
• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker number is fixed to “4ch.”
~
Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select one of the DSP modes.
3
Select your listening seat position.
•
To finish the procedure
•
To adjust the effect level
Go to step
!
.
For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect level is not adjustable.
!
Adjust the effect level.
4
Select the speaker to be adjusted.
*
Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step
2
.
•
To finish the procedure
Continued on the next page
15
16
5
Select the distance between the selected speaker and the seat.
3
Finish the procedure.
Once you have set the distance, it is memorized for each seat position selected in step
3
. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select the seat position.
To change the measuring unit
Using the equalizer—EQ
You can adjust the sound equalization patterns to your preference by using either Graphic EQ or Parametric EQ.
• Adjust the equalizer to match the reproducible frequency range of the connected speakers; otherwise, the adjustments may not be effective.
6
7
Repeat steps
4
and
5
to adjust the distance for the other speakers.
Finish the procedure.
Selecting preset sound modes—
Graphic EQ
Sound modes
Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B
(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,
Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Activating BBE Digital
BBE Digital is a digital processing method to restore the brilliance and clarity of the original live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach the ear than low frequency sounds.
BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship between the low, mid, and high frequencies by adding a progressively longer delay time to the low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.
1
Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).
2
Select the effect level.
3
Select a sound mode.
4
Finish the procedure.
Storing your own sound modes
1
Select a sound mode.
2
Select a frequency band.
3
Select a band.
Band1
: 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz
Band2
: 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz
Band3
: 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz
4
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected band.
3
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected frequency band.
5
Select the frequency.
4
Repeat steps
2
and
3
to adjust the other frequency bands.
5
6
Select one of the user modes.
• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each other. (Only selectable frequencies are shown on the display.)
6
Select the band width (Q).
7
Store the adjustments.
• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.
Then repeat steps
3
to
6
.
7
Finish the procedure.
Adjusting Parametric EQ
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Once you have made adjustments, it is memorized. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select Parametric EQ.
17
Activating crossover network
By activating crossover network, you can allocate different frequency range of sound signals to different speakers to match their characteristic.
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following:
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For 3-way network speaker system, see
Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).
You cannot perform other operations until you finish the following procedure.
While the power is turned off...
~
Ÿ
To cancel Crossover,
repeat the same procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?” appears on the display.
• indicator goes off.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.
~
Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select a setting item.
*
Appears only when crossover network is activated (see left column).
When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or
“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER to enter its submenu.
!
Adjust the selected setting item.
(See the following for details.)
• To adjust other SEL settings, press
BACK. Then repeat steps
Ÿ
and
!
.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
18
!
To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal
•
Fad (fader)
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
•
To cancel the procedure,
press and hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power turns off.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
• indicator lights up (in sequence with other indicators).
•
Bal (balance)
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
To adjust reproduced frequency level—X-Over
This setting is available only when crossover network (see page 18) is activated.
1
Select a filter.
To adjust subwoofer output—
S.woofer
1
Adjust the output level.
HPF
(Front/Rear)
: Frequencies lower than the selected level are cut-off.
LPF (Rear)
: Frequencies higher than the selected level are cut-off.
2
Select “On” to activate the selected filter.
• If you connect high-range speakers to
Front or Rear output, select “On” for the corresponding HPF to prevent the speakers from being damaged.
2
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected subwoofer.
3
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
3
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected speakers.
1.6kHz – 16.0kHz
: Front HPF and Rear LPF
31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz
: Rear HPF
4
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
To adjust the input level of each source—Vol Adj
This setting is required for each source except for FM.
Once an adjustment is made, it will be memorized. When you change the source the volume level will automatically increase or decrease according to the adjusted level.
1
Select a source before entering the SEL menu.
2
Adjust to match the input level to the FM sound level.
19
20
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items (except “Sirius ID”) listed in the table that follows.
1
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
2
Select a PSM item.
3
Select or adjust the selected PSM item.
4
Repeat steps
2
and
3
to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.
5
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Demo
Display demonstration
Anime
Animation
Clock H
Hour adjustment
Clock M
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
Clock Adj
*
1
Time display mode
Time Zone
Time zone
*
1,
*
2
Items Settings, [reference page]
•
•
•
On
Off
On
[Initial]
[Initial]
: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].
: Cancels.
: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power, change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.
: Cancels.
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
Off
1
–
12
(
0
–
23
)
[Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]
00
–
59
[Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
12Hours
[Initial]
•
24Hours
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
Auto
[Initial]
•
Off
•
Eastern
[Initial]
•
Atlantic
•
Newfndlnd
•
Alaska
•
Pacific
•
Mountain
•
Central
: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the clock data provided via the satellite radio channel.
: Cancels.
: Select your residential area from one of the following time zones for clock adjustment.
Indications Items Settings, [reference page]
DST
* 1
Daylight savings time
•
•
On
Off
[Initial] : Activates daylight savings time if your residential area is subject to
DST.
: Cancels.
: Your SIRIUS identification number appears on the display, [25].
Sirius ID
* 3
SIRIUS ID
Scroll
*
4
Dimmer
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Once
Auto
Off
Auto
Off
On
[Initial]
[Initial]
Time Set
: Scrolls the track information once.
: Repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).
: Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.
: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.
: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 23 for setting.
From: Any hour; To: Any hour
: Cancels.
: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)
Bright
Display brightness
ID3 Tag
Tag display
Theme
Display theme
IF Band
Intermediate frequency band
Area
Tuner channel interval
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
–
10
[Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear and legible. (If Dimmer is set to “On”, selecting “1” to “4” takes no effect.)
•
On
[Initial]
Off
: Shows the Tag information display while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
: Cancels.
(
(
Large
1
1
US
SA
EU
[Initial] or
Small
[Initial] or
Auto
Wide
[Initial]
[Initial]
2
2
)
)
: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 23 for setting.
: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 23 for setting.
: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
: When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.
: When using in South American countries where FM interval is
100 kHz. AM interval is set to 10 kHz.
: When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to
9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).
*
1
Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio is connected.
*
2
Displayed only when “Clock Adj” is set to “Auto.”
*
3
Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio is connected.
* 4
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Continued on the next page
21
22
Indications Items Settings, [reference page]
Beep
Key-touch tone
Ext In
*
5
External input
Tel
Telephone muting
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
•
Off
[Initial]
: Activates the key-touch tone.
: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
•
Changer
[Initial]
•
Ext In
: To use a JVC CD changer, [18], a JVC compatible satellite (SIRIUS/
XM) tuner, [25], or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player, [29].
: To use any other external component than the above, [31].
•
Muting 1/
Muting 2
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.
• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.
: Cancels.
Amp Gain
Amplifier gain control
•
•
•
High PWR
Low PWR
Off
: Volume 00 – Volume 50
: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)
: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
*
5
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.
Selecting timer for the dimmer
You can dim the display at night or as you set the timer.
1
Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu.
2
Select “Time Set.”
Selecting the graphic theme
You can select the graphic theme for large and small display sizes (see also page 5).
1
Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.
2
Select the size of the display.
3
Adjust the dimmer time.
1
Set the dimmer start time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
3
Select the theme.
4
Repeat steps
2
and
3
to select the other display size and theme.
5
Finish the procedure.
2
Set the dimmer end time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
To show the selected display theme,
press
DISP repeatedly while playing a source.
4
Finish the procedure.
23
24
2
Select a character.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to station frequencies,
CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer) and the external components (LINE-IN and
EXT-IN).
3
Move to the next (or previous) character position.
Sources Maximum number of characters
Station frequencies
Up to 16 characters (up to 30 station frequencies including both FM and AM)
CDs/CD-CH * Up to 32 characters (up to 30 discs)
External component
Up to 16 characters
*
You cannot assign names to any discs other than conventional CDs.
1
Select the sources.
• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external component: Select
“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”
2
Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character set.
4
Repeat steps
1
and
3
until you finish entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
• To cancel the title entry without registration, press
MENU.
To erase the entire title
In step
3
...
A
(A – Z: upper case)
=
a
(a – z: lower case)
=
0
(numbers and symbols)
=
Á
(Accented letters: upper case)
=
á
(Accented letters: lower case)
=
(back to the beginning)
• For available characters, see page 37.
Satellite radio operations
This unit is satellite (SAT) Radio Ready— compatible with both SIRIUS Satellite radio and
XM Satellite radio.
Activate your SIRIUS subscription after connection:
1
Before operating your satellite radio:
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied with your SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio.
•
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo are registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Inc.
•
XM and its corresponding logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
•
“SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS
Satellite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio,
Inc.
Listening to the satellite radio
Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.
•
JVC SIRIUS radio DLP
—Down Link
Processor, for listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.
•
XMDirect
TM
Universal Tuner Box
—Using a JVC Smart Digital Adapter (XMDJVC100: not supplied), for listening to the XM Satellite radio.
2
JVC DLP starts updating all the SIRIUS channels.
Once completed, JVC DLP tunes in to the preset channel, CH184.
3
Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 21.
4
Contact SIRIUS on the internet at
<http://activate.siriusradio.com/> to activate your subscription, or you can call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-
SIRIUS (7474).
“Subscription Updated Press Any Key to
Continue” appears on the display once subscription has been completed.
Activate your XM subscription after connection:
• Only Channel 0, 1, and 247 are available
1 before activation.
GCI (Global Control Information) update:
• If channels are updated after subscription, updating starts automatically.
The following appears and no sound can be heard.
– For SIRIUS Satellite radio: “Channels
Updating XX% * Completed”
– For XM Satellite radio: “UPDATING”
• Update takes a few minutes to complete.
• During update, you cannot operate your satellite radio.
*
Changes every 20% of update is completion,
(ex. 20%, 40%, 60%).
2
XMDirect
TM
Universal Tuner Box starts updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1” is tuned in automatically.
3
Check your XM Satellite radio
ID labelled on the casing of the
XMDirect
TM
Universal Tuner Box, or tune in to “Channel 0” (see page 27).
Continued on the next page
25
26
4
Contact XM Satellite radio on the internet at <http://xmradio.
com/activation/> to activate your subscription, or you can call 1-800-
XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).
Once completed, the unit tunes in to one of the available channels (Channel 4 or higher).
1
2
Listening to the XM Satellite radio
Listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio
1
2
3
Select a category.
You can tune in to all the channels of every category by selecting “ALL.”
Selecting a particular category (SPORTS,
ENTERTAINMENT, etc.) allows you to enjoy only the channels from the selected category.
• Holding either of the buttons can display the category list (see page 28).
4
Select a channel for listening.
3
Select a channel for listening.
Holding the button changes the channels rapidly.
Searching for category/channel
You can search for programs by category
(Category Search) or channel number (Channel
Search).
•
In Category Search,
you can tune in to the channels of the selected category. Category
Search begins from the currently selected channel.
•
In Channel Search,
you can tune in to all channels (including non-categorised channels).
1
Select a category (Category Search).
• For Channel Search, skip this step.
2
Select a channel for listening.
If no operation is done for about 15 seconds,
Category Search is canceled.
Holding the button changes the channels rapidly.
• When changing the category or channel, invalid and unsubscribed channels are skipped.
In Channel Search, channel name and channel number appear on the display during search.
• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed channels are skipped.
Checking the XM Satellite radio ID
While selecting “XM1,” “XM2,” or
“XM3,” select “Channel 0.”
5
6
Select a user preset number.
The display alternately shows “RADIO ID” and the 8-digit (alphanumeric) ID number.
To cancel the ID number display,
select any channel other than “Channel 0.”
• You can move to the lists of the other SIRIUS bands by turning the control dial.
7
Store the channel.
Storing user channels in memory
You can preset six channels for each band.
Ex.: Storing a SIRIUS channel into preset number 4 of the SR1 band.
1
1
Listening to a user preset channel
2
2
• Holding the button displays the User
Preset Channel List (see step
6
on the right column).
3
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
4
Select “Preset.”
• Holding this button displays the User
Preset Channel List (see step
6
above).
3
Perform steps
3
to
6
(on the left column) to select a user preset channel.
4
Finish the procedure.
27
28
Selecting a category/channel on the list
Selecting a category from the list
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select “Category.”
Selecting a channel from the list
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select “Channel.”
3
3
4
Select a channel you want.
4
Select a category you want.
• You can move to the other lists by turning the control dial.
5
Finish the procedure.
• You can move to the other lists by turning the control dial.
5
Finish the procedure.
To change the display information while listening to a channel
The first channel of the selected category is tuned in.
• If you select the current category
(highlighted on the display), its channel list appears.
Holding
5
/
∞
also shows the Category List while listening to a channel.
Category name and channel name
=
Artist/ composer
*
name and song/program name
=
Clock
=
Small graphic display
=
Large graphic display
=
(back to the beginning)
*
Only for SIRIUS Satellite radio.
iPod®/D. player operations
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.
Before operating your iPod or D. player:
Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.
•
Interface adapter for iPod
®
—KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.
•
D. player interface adapter
—KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.
!
Adjust the volume.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.
To pause
*
1
or stop
*
2
playback
To resume playback, press it again.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
Caution:
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.
To go to the next or previous tracks
Preparations:
Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external input setting, see page 22.
~
*
1
For iPod
*
2
For D. player
Ÿ
Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused *
1
or stopped *
2 previously.
29
30
Selecting a track from the menu
1
Enter the main menu.
Selecting the playback modes
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
Now the
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
buttons work as the menu selecting buttons * .
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
–
If no operations are done for about
5 seconds.
–
When you confirm the selection of a track.
2
Select the desired menu.
3
Select an item (see table below).
4
Finish the procedure.
For iPod:
Playlists
Ô
Artists
Ô
Albums
Ô
Songs
Ô
Genres
Ô
Composers
Ô
(back to the beginning)
For D. player:
Playlist
Ô
Artist
Ô
Album
Ô
Genre
Ô
Track
Ô
(back to the beginning)
3
Confirm the selection.
To move back to the previous menu, press
5
.
• If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps
2
and
3
until the desired track is played.
• Holding
4
/
¢
can skip 10 items at a time.
Repeat play
One
All
Off
: Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Mode
=
One” for the D. player.
: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode
=
All” for the D. player.
: Cancels.
Random play
Album
* : Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
Song
/
On
: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Off
Songs” of the iPod or “Random
Play
=
On” of the D. player.
: Cancels.
*
For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums” of the main “MENU.”
Other external component operations
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input
Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input
Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see pages 11 – 14; For iPod, or D.player, see pages
29 – 30.
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
~
Connector
LINE-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
LINE IN plugs.
EXT-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
CD changer jack.
If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 22 and select the external input (“Ext In”).
Ÿ
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
!
Adjust the volume.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its case,
press down the center holder of the case and lift the disc out, holding it by the edges.
Center holder
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case,
gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
Continued on the next page
31
32
To keep discs clean
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
How to handle SD card
SD cards are precision products. DO NOT impact, bend, drop, or wet them.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Stick-on label
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.
• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been assigned to the audio CD (see page 24), it will be shown on the display.
• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/
WMA track, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down, the control panel moves down, and the disc automatically ejects from the loading slot.
• If you keep the control panel open for about
1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep” setting is turned “On”—see page 22) the control panel returns to its previous position.
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with “Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.
Playing an MP3/WMA discs
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,
1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.
• The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo * : up to 128 (72) characters
– Joliet * : up to 64 (36) characters
– Windows long file name * : up to 128 (72) characters
*
The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is
313 or more.
33
34
• This unit can play back the files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
• For SD card: The maximum number of characters for folder name is 8 characters; file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot recognize folder with period (.) on the folder name.
For USB memory: The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.
• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of
255 files and 63 folders.
For USB memory: This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a
USB memory
• While playing from an SD card or a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some
SD cards or USB memories due to their characteristics or recording conditions.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing some buttons on the control panel.
• If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, “No Files” appears and the unit returns to the previous source.
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to the center.
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.
• You cannot change the input level—
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to adjust it.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)
Sound adjustments
Selecting the DSP modes—DSP
• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the recording condition of the sources:
– Monaural sources such as AM and monaural FM broadcasting programs.
– Multiplex sound sources.
– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a chorus, or only a few instruments.
• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are used only to reproduce reflections and reverberations in order to create a being-there feeling in your car compartment.
• If fader or balance has been set close to its extreme, appropriate effect may not be obtained.
• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker number when “Defeat” is selected with crossover network activated.
General settings — PSM
• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than
“Auto.”
• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”
Storing your own sound modes
• If you do not want to store your current adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment to the current playback source, press MENU to go back to the operation screen of the current source. Adjustment you made remains effective until you select a sound mode.
35
36
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc in the unit and vice versa.
Satellite radio operations
• You can also connect the JVC SIRIUS radio
PnP (Plug and Play), using the JVC SIRIUS radio adapter, KS-U100K (not supplied) to the CD changer jack on the rear.
By turning on/off the power of the unit, you can turn on/off the JVC PnP. However, you cannot control it from this unit.
• To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or to sign up, visit «http://www.sirius.com».
• For the latest channel listings and programming information, or to sign up for
XM Satellite radio, visit «http://www.xmradio.
com».
iPod® or D. player operations
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
D. player is charged through this unit.
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all operations from the iPod or D. player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or
D. player and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than
16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 21). This unit can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:
For iPod users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>
For D. player users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>
Available characters
In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.
Accented letters: upper case Numbers and symbols
Accented letters: lower case
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User 1
User 2
User 3
Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode
Sound mode
Preset equalizing value
63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
+06 +06 +04 +02 00 00 +02 +04 +02
+06 +04 +04 +04
00 +04 +02 00
00
00
+02
+02
+02
+02
+02
+02
+06
+04
+06 +04 +02 +02 +02 +02 +02 +06 +04
+08 +04 +02
+04 +02 00
+06 +02 00
+04 +06 +04 +02
00 00 00 00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
–04 –02
00 00
+02 +04 +04 +04 +06
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
+02
+02
+02 +04
00
00
00
00
00
00
+02
+04
00
00
00
00
37
38
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “Connect Error” appears on the display.
• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the control panel movement is freezed.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach it again (see pages 4 and 31).
Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the installation.
Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
Connect the antenna firmly.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped.
Insert the disc correctly.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for recording.
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.
• Unlock the disc (see page 14).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading
Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).
Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Noise is generated.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
Symptoms
• A longer readout time is required (“File
Check” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have intended them to play.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.
Remedies/Causes
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “No Music” appears on the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
• Noise is generated.
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then returns to the previous source.
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.
Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 37).
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• Readout time varies depending on the device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an appropriate format.
The track is unplayable.
• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display while playing tracks from an SD card.
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted correctly.
The files included in the device are corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the display.
Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the device.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try again.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 37).
Continued on the next page
39
40
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• “No Disc” appears on the display.
• “No Magazine” appears on the display.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press the reset button of the CD changer.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Deactivate crossover network (see page 18).
• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes than “Defeat.”
• Only high range sound or low range sound is reproduced though full range speakers are connected.
• “CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” scrolls on the display while listening to the
SIRIUS Satellite radio.
Starts subscribing SIRIUS Satellite radio (see page 25).
• No sound can be heard. “Channel Updating
XX%
*
Completed” appears on the display.
• Either “No Signal” or “NO SIGNAL” appears on the display.
• Either “No Antenna” or “CHECK ANTENNA” appears on the display.
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
The unit is updating the channel information and it takes a few minutes to complete.
Move to an area where signals are stronger.
Connect the antenna firmly.
• “Invalid Channel” appears on the display for about 5 seconds, then returns to the previous display while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.
• “No Name” appears or scrolls on the display while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display while listening to the XM Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display for about 2 seconds, then returns to the previous channel while listening to the XM Satellite radio.
• “OFF AIR” appears on the display while listening to the XM Satellite radio.
No broadcast on the selected channel.
Select another channel or continue listening to the previous channel.
No text information for the selected channel.
Selected channel is no longer available or is unauthorized.
Select another channel or continue listening to the previous channel.
Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.
*
Changes every 20% of update is completion, (ex. 20%, 40%, 60%).
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• “LOADING” appears on the display while listening to the XM Satellite radio.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display.
• Satellite radio does not work at all.
• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does not work.
Select another channel or continue listening to the previous channel.
The unit is loading the channel information and audio. Text information are temporarily unavailable.
Reconnect this unit and the satellite radio correctly and reset this unit.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
• Buttons do not work as intended.
• The sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display.
• Playback stops.
The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press
POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/
D. player.
Check the connecting cable and its connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart the playback operation using the control panel (see page
29).
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard when connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard.
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when connecting a D. player.
• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the display.
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it again.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/
D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work after disconnecting from this unit.
Reset the iPod or D. player.
•
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
SD logo is a trademark.
•
Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.
Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.
•
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
41
42
Specifications
Power Output: 20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4
Ω
and
≤
1% THD+N
Signal to Noise Ratio: 80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4
Ω
)
Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control
Range:
Frequency Response:
Level:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Frequencies:
Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz
(9 bands)
Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,
100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,
1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)
±10 dB
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Level/Impedance: Line-In:
Line-Out:
1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Output Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
Other Terminals:
1 kΩ
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
LINE IN, CD changer
Frequency Range:
FM Tuner
FM:
AM:
87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
(with channel interval set to 200 kHz)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
AM Tuner
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
30 dB
20 μV/65 dB
Type: Compact disc player
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
Frequency Response:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
102 dB
Wow and Flutter:
MP3:
WMA:
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
MP3:
WMA:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Less than measurable limit
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 320 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
FAT 12/16
8 MB – 512 MB
MP3/WMA
8 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 192 kbps
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
Max. Current:
MP3:
WMA:
Mass (approx.):
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Operating Voltage: Power Requirement:
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):
Panel Size (approx.):
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
FAT 12/16/32
Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
MP3/WMA
Less than 500 mA
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
5 kbps – 320 kbps
8 kHz – 48 kHz
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
0°C to +40°C
(32°F to 104°F)
182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm
(7-3/16
"
× 2-1/16
"
× 6-7/16
"
)
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
(7-7/16
"
× 2-5/16
"
× 7/16
"
)
1.7 k
g
(3.8 lbs) (excluding accessories)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.
43
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Still having trouble??
USA ONLY
Call 1-800-252-5722
http://www.jvc.com
We can help you!
EN, SP, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0206DTSMDTJEIN
KD-SH1000
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual de instalación/conexión
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
GET0364-002A
[J]
ENGLISH
This unit is designed to operate on
12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems
. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
ESPAÑOL
Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con
12 V de CC, con sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA
. Si su vehículo no posee este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.
0206DTSMDTJEIN
EN, SP, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
FRANÇAIS
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de
courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE
. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
•
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
ADVERTENCIAS
Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas antes de instalar la unidad.
•
Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis del automóvil después de la instalación.
AVERTISSEMENTS
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements
électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
•
Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of
4
Ω
to 8
Ω ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Notas:
• Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.
• Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima de más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia de
4
Ω
a 8
Ω ). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie
“Amp Gain” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 22 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta aislante.
• El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.
Remarques:
•
Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
•
Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre
4
Ω
et 8
Ω
). Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amp Gain” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 22 du MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
•
Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont
PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.
•
Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.
Heat sink
Sumidero térmico
Dissipateur de chaleur
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
•
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces:
•
NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían producirse graves daños en la unidad.
• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su automóvil.
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:
•
NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.
•
AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.
Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión
Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.
A
/
B
Hard case/Control panel
Estuche duro/Panel de control
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande
C
Sleeve
Cubierta
Manchon
D
Trim plate
Placa de guarnición
Plaque d’assemblage
E
Power cord
Cordón de alimentación
Cordon d’alimentation
I
Rubber cushion
Cojín de goma
Amortisseur en caoutchouc
J
Handles
Manijas
Poignées
F
Washer (ø5)
Arandela (ø5)
Rondelle (ø5)
G
Lock nut (M5)
Tuerca de seguridad (M5)
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)
H
Mounting bolt—M5
×
20 mm (M5
×
13/16")
Perno de montaje—M5
×
20 mm (M5
×
13/16 pulgada)
Boulon de montage—M5
×
20 mm (M5
×
13/16 pouces)
L
Battery
Pila
Pile
1
K
Remote controller
Control remoto
Télécommade
INSTALLATION
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)
INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL
TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE
TABLEAU DE BORD)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas.
• Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad, hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado.
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie d’approvisionnement.
•
Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien qualifié.
Do the required electrical connections.
Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.
Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour maintenir le manchon en place.
*
*
1
1
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no dañar el fusible provisto en la parte posterior.
*
1
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Extracción de la unidad
Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.
*
2
Fit the protrusions outside the unit.
*
2
Haga encajar los salientes del exterior de la unidad.
*
2
Fixez les protubérances à l’extérieur de l’appareil.
Retrait de l’appareil
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación, extráigalas de la manera indicada en la ilustración para poder desmontar la unidad.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en option
Dashboard
Tablero de instrumentos
Tableau de bord
Fire wall
Tabique a prueba de incendios
Cloison
Stay (option)
Soporte (opción)
Hauban (en option)
Screw (option)
Tornillo (opción)
Vis (en option)
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Flat type screws—M5
×
8 mm
(M5
×
3/8")
* 3
Tornillos tipo plano—M5
×
8 mm
(M5
×
3/8 pulgada)
*
* 3
Vis à tête plate—M5
×
8 mm
(M5
×
3/8 pouces)
3
Bracket
* 3
Ménsula
* 3
Support
* 3
Compartimiento
Poche
Bracket *
3
Ménsula
* 3
Support
* 3
* 3 Not supplied for this unit.
* 3 No suministrado con esta unidad.
*
3
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
Flat type screws—M5
×
8 mm
(M5
×
3/8") *
3
Tornillos tipo plano—M5
×
8 mm
(M5
×
3/8 pulgada)
*
*
3
Vis à tête plate—M5
×
8 mm
(M5
×
3/8 pouces)
3
Note
Nota
:
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8")-long screws. If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
:
Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.
Remarque :
Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm
(3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
Caution when installing / Precaución en la instalación / Précautions lors de l’installation
Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.
• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).
Introduzca el receptor en la manga de montaje utilizando las cuatro esquinas de la placa decorativa.
• NO presione el panel (sombreado en la ilustración).
Fixez l’appareil sur le manchon de montage en utilisant les quatre coins de la plaque de garniture.
•
NE POUSSEZ PAS sur le panneau (en gris sur l’illustration).
2
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
A
Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques
Before connecting:
Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2
Connect the antenna cord.
3
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Antes de la conexión:
Verifique atentamente el conexionado del vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la unidad.
Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector procedentes de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes en color.
1
Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.
2
Conecte el cable de antena.
3
Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.
If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car,
see diagram for speaker connection.
Si ha instalado el sistema de altavoces de 3 vías en su automóvil,
véase el diagrama para la conexión de los altavoces.
Avant de commencer la connexion:
Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.
1
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
2
Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
3
Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.
Si vous avez installé un système d’enceintes à 3 voies,
référez-vous au diagramme pour la connexion des enceintes.
Antenna connector
Conector de antena
Connecteur d’antenne
To subwoofer (see diagram )
Al subwoofer (véase diagrama )
Au caisson de grave (voir le diagramme )
LINE IN
(see diagram /
véase el diagrama /
voir le diagramme )
Rear ground terminal
Terminal de tierra posterior
Borne arrière de masse
Line out (see diagram )
Salida de línea (véase diagrama )
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme )
To external components (see diagram )
A los componentes externos (véase el diagrama )
Aux appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme )
*
4 Not supplied for this unit.
*
4 No suministrado con esta unidad.
* 4
Non fourni avec cet appareil.
* 5
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.
*
5 Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa a de la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se podrá conectar la alimentación.
* 5 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.
Black
Negro
Noir
15 A fuse
Fusible de 15 A
Fusible 15 A
To metallic body or chassis of the car
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Ignition switch
Interruptor de encendido
Interrupteur d’allumage
Yellow * 5
Amarillo
Jaune
Red
Rojo
Rouge
*
5
* 5
Blue with white stripe
Azul con rayas blancas
Bleu avec bande blanche
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
Fuse block
Bloque de fusibles
Porte-fusible
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
(200 mA max.)
Orange with white stripe
Naranja con rayas blancas
Orange avec bande blanche
To car light control switch
Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
Brown
Marrón
Marrone
To cellular phone system
Al sistema de teléfono celular
Al cellulare
White with black stripe
Blanco con rayas negras
Blanc avec bande noire
White
Blanco
Blanc
Gray with black stripe
Gris con rayas negras
Gris avec bande noire
Left speaker (front)
Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Gray
Gris
Gris
Green with black stripe
Verde con rayas negras
Vert avec bande noire
Right speaker (front)
Altavoz derecho (frontal)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Green
Verde
Vert
Purple with black stripe
Púrpura con rayas negras
Violet avec bande noire
Left speaker (rear)
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Purple
Púrpura
Violet
Right speaker (rear)
Altavoz derecho (trasero)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
3
ENGLISH
ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS
B
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer
/
Conexión de los amplificadores y/o subwoofer externos / Connexion d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.
• For amplifier only:
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit.
Usted podrá conectar amplificadores para mejorar el sistema estéreo de su automóvil.
•
Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta unidad.
• Sólo para el amplificador:
– Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad quedan sin usar.
– Podrá desconectar el amplificador incorporado y enviar las señales de audio solamente al(los) amplificador(es) externo(s) para obtener sonidos nítidos y evitar que se caliente el interior de la unidad.
Consulte la página 22 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES (volumen separado).
– El nivel de salida de línea de esta unidad permanece alto para que corresponda con los sonidos de alta fidelidad reproducidos por esta unidad.
Cuando conecte un amplificador externo a esta unidad, disminuya el control de ganancia del amplificador externo para obtener un
óptimo rendimiento de esta unidad.
Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre système autoradio.
•
Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
• Pour l’amplificateur seulement:
– Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectezles à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.
– Vous pouvez désactiver l’amplificateur intégré et envoyer les signaux audio uniquement à un ou plusieurs amplificateurs extérieurs afin d’obtenir un son clair et pour éviter un
échauffement interne de l’appareil (voir page 22 du MANUEL
D’INSTRUCTIONS).
– Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi pour les sons reproduits par cet appareil.
Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à cet appareil, diminuez le réglage du gain sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.
Remote lead
Cable remoto
Fil d’alimentation à distance
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Caisson de grave
Rear speakers
Altavoces posteriores
Enceintes arrière
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
Front speakers
Altavoces delanteros
Enceintes avant
Front speakers
Altavoces delanteros
Enceintes avant
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
* 1 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 1 Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la unidad.
*
1
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
* 2 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 2 Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)
* 2
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
TROUBLESHOOTING
•
The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
•
Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
•
No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
•
Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
•
Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
•
This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
•
This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS
•
El fusible se quema.
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES
•
Le fusible saute.
*
Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
•
*
•
*
•
*
*
No es posible conectar la alimentación.
¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?
No sale sonido de los altavoces.
¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?
El sonido presenta distorsión.
¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una masa común?
•
Perturbación de ruido.
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?
•
L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
*
Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
•
Pas de son des enceintes.
*
Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
•
Le son est déformé.
*
Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
*
Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
à la masse?
•
Interférence avec les sons.
*
La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
•
La unidad se calienta.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una masa común?
•
*
Este receptor no funciona en absoluto.
¿Reinicializó el receptor?
4
•
L’appareil devient chaud.
*
Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
*
Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
à la masse?
•
Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
*
Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
C
Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / Conexiones de los altavoces para el sistema de altavoces de 3 vías / Connexion des enceintes pour un système d’enceintes à 3 voies
You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3way network speaker system (high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).
Podrá disfrutar de un “sonido puro” en su automóvil conectando un sistema de altavoces de 3 vías (rango alto/rango medio/subwoofer).
Vous pouvez recréer un monde de “son pur” dans votre voiture en connectant un système d’enceintes à trois voies (hautes fréquences/ moyennes fréquences/extrêmes graves).
IMPORTANT:
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following.
• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially for
HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For details about the setting, see pages 18 and 19 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.
IMPORTANTE:
Si ha instalado el sistema de altavoces de 3 vías en el automóvil, compruebe lo siguiente.
• Conecte el sistema de altavoces de la manera mostrada en la siguiente ilustración.
• Antes de usar el sistema, active la red de cruce y preajuste las frecuencias de corte apropiadas para HPF/LPF (especialmente para HPF); de lo contrario, se podrán dañar los altavoces.
• Para los detalles acerca del ajuste, consulte las páginas
18 y 19 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.
IMPORTANT:
Si vous avez installé un système d’enceintes à trois voies dans votre voiture, assurez-vous de ce qui suit.
• Connectez le système d’enceintes comme montré ci-dessous.
• Avant d’utiliser le système, mettez en service le réseau de transition et préréglez les fréquences de coupure appropriées pour HPF/LPF (plus spécialement pour
HPF); sinon, les enceintes risqueraient d’être endommagées.
• Pour en savoir plus sur les réglages, référez-vous aux pages 18 et
19 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output
Cuando conecte los altavoces (rango alto/rango medio) a través de la salida de altavoz
Lors de la connexion des enceintes (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences) aux sorties d’enceinte
White
Blanco
Blanc
Left high-range speaker
Altavoz de rango alto izquierdo
Haut-parleur hautes fréquences gauche
White with black stripe
Blanco con rayas negras
Blanc avec bande noire
Gray
Gris
Gris
Gray with black stripe
Gris con rayas negras
Gris avec bande noire
Left mid-range speaker
Altavoz de rango medio izquierdo
Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences gauche
Green
Verde
Vert
Green with black stripe
Verde con rayas negras
Vert avec bande noire
Purple
Púrpura
Violet
Purple with black stripe
Púrpura con rayas negras
Violet avec bande noire
Right high-range speaker
Altavoz de rango alto derecho
Haut-parleur hautes fréquences droit
Right mid-range speaker
Altavoz de rango mediano derecho
Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences droit
To subwoofer out
A salida del subwoofer
À la sortie du caisson de grave
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)
Connecting subwoofer / Conexión del subwoofer / Connexion du haut-parleur d’extrêmes graves
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Remote lead
Cable remoto
Fil d’alimentation à distance
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Caisson de grave
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to obtain more powerful sound
Cuando conecte los altavoces (rango alto/rango medio) a través de los amplificadores externos—para obtener un sonido más potente
Lors de la connexion des enceintes (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences) à travers des amplificateurs extérieurs—pour obtenir un son plus puissant
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
To LINE OUT (REAR)
A LINE OUT (REAR)
À LINE OUT (REAR)
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
To LINE OUT (FRONT)
A LINE OUT (FRONT)
À LINE OUT (FRONT)
Left high-range speaker
Altavoz de rango alto izquierdo
Haut-parleur hautes fréquences gauche
Left mid-range speaker
Altavoz de rango medio izquierdo
Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences gauche
Right high-range speaker
Altavoz de rango alto derecho
Haut-parleur hautes fréquences droit
Right mid-range speaker
Altavoz de rango mediano derecho
Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences droit
*
3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 3
Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la unidad.
* 3
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
*
4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 4
Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)
* 4
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
5
D
Connecting the external components / Conexión de los componentes externos / Connexion des appareils extérieurs
JVC CD changer, SIRIUS Satellite radio, XM Satellite radio, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Cambiador de CD de JVC, radio satelital SIRIUS, radio satelital XM, iPod® de Apple o reproductor JVC D. / Changeur de CD JVC, radio satellite SIRIUS, radio satellite XM, iPod® Apple ou lecteur D. JVC
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “Changer” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 22 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) /
Réglez “Changer” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below.
• For listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio, connect a JVC DLP
—Down Link Processor (separately purchased) to this unit.
• The iPod *
5
or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for
D. player).
Estos componentes se pueden conectar en serie, tal como se muestra en la ilustración de abajo.
• Para escuchar la radio satelital SIRIUS, conecte un DLP (Down Link
Processor) de JVC (adquirido por separado) al receptor.
• Puede conectar el iPod * 5 o el reproductor D. usando un adaptador de interfaz (no suministrado)—KS-PD100 (para iPod) o KS-PD500
(para el reproductor D.).
Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur l’illustration.
•
Pour écouter la radio satellite SIRIUS, connectez un processeur DLP JVC
—Processeur de signaux satellite-terre (vendu séparément) à cet appareil.
•
Le iPod
* 5
ou le lecteur D. peut être connecté en utilisant un adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou
KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Conexión 1 (conexión integrada) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)
CD changer jack
Jack para el cambiador de CD
Prise du changeur CD
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)
or o
ou
JVC DLP
DLP JVC
Processeur DLP JVC
JVC CD changer
Cambiador de CD de JVC
Changeur de CD JVC
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
Reproductor D. JVC (adquirido separadamente)
Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)
To CD changer, KS-PD100, or KS-PD500
Al cambiador de CD,
KS-PD100 o KS-PD500
Au changeur de CD,
KS-PD100 ou KS-PD500
• For listening to the XM Satellite radio, you can also connect XMDirect
TM
Universal Tuner Box (separately purchased) through this unit using JVC
Smart Digital Adapter—XMDJVC100 (not supplied).
• Para escuchar la radio satelital XM, también puede conectar el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™ (adquirido por separado) al receptor mediante un adaptador Smart Digital XMDJVC100 de JVC (no suministrado).
•
Pour écouter la radio satellite XM, vous pouvez aussi connecter le tuner universel XMDirect
TM
(vendu séparément) à cet appareil en utilisant l’adaptateur numérique intelligent JVC—XMDJVC100 (non fourni).
Antenna (supplied with XMDirect
TM
Universal Tuner Box)
Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)
Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect
TM
)
XMDirect
TM
Universal Tuner Box
Sintonizador universal XMDirect
™
Tuner universel XMDirect
TM
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Conexión 2 (conexión alternativa) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)
CD changer jack
Jack para el cambiador de CD
Prise du changeur CD
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)
or o
ou
JVC DLP
DLP JVC
Processeur DLP JVC
or o
ou
JVC CD changer
Cambiador de CD de JVC
Changeur de CD JVC
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
Reproductor D. JVC (adquirido separadamente)
Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)
Antenna (supplied with XMDirect
TM
Universal Tuner Box)
Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)
Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect
TM
)
XMDirect
TM
Universal Tuner Box
Sintonizador universal XMDirect
™
Tuner universel XMDirect
TM
CAUTION / PRECAUCION / PRECAUTION:
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
• Antes de conectar los componentes externos, asegúrese de que la unidad esté apagada.
• Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs, assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.
* 5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
*
5 registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod es una marca comercial de Apple
Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y otros países.
* 5
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple
Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
* 6 Connecting cord supplied with your
JVC CD changer or DLP
* 6 Conexión del cable suministrado para su cambiador de CD o DLP JVC
*
6
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre changeur CD ou processeur DLP JVC
* 7 Signal cord supplied with your
Smart Digital Adapter
* 7 Cable de señal suministrado con el adaptador Smart Digital
*
7
Cordon de signal fourni avec votre adaptateur numérique intelligent
* 8 Audio signal cord supplied with your
Smart Digital Adapter
* 8 Cable de señal de audio suministrado con el adaptador Smart Digital
*
8
Cordon audio fourni avec votre adaptateur numérique intelligent
JVC PnP (Plug and Play) / PnP (“Plug and Play”) JVC / PnP (“Plug and Play”) JVC
• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “Ext In” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 22 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez
“Ext In” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
You can also connect JVC PnP through this unit using JVC SIRIUS radio adapter,
KS-U100K (not supplied).
• Turning on/off the unit can also turns on/off the JVC PnP.
También podrá conectar la PnP JVC a través de este receptor utilizando el adaptador
Stereo mini plug
Miniclavija estéreo
Fiche stéré mini
To headphones jack
Al jack para auriculares
À la prise du casque d’écoute
para radio SIRIUS JVC, KS-U100K (no suministrado).
• Al encender/apagar el receptor también se enciende/apaga la PnP JVC.
Vous pouvez aussi connecter le PnP JVC à cet autoradio en utilisant l’adaptateur de radio SIRIUS JVC KS-U100K (non fourni).
•
Mettre sous/hors tension l’autoradio peut aussi mettre sous/hors tension le PnP JVC.
CD changer jack
Jack para el cambiador de CD
Prise du changeur CD
DC power plug
Clavija de alimentación de CC
Fiche d’alimentation CC
To DC IN jack
Al jack DC IN
À la prise DC IN
Other external component / Otro componente externo / Autre appareil extérieur
• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “Ext In” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 22 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez “Ext In” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
External component
Componente exterior
Appareil extérieur
External component
Componente exterior
Appareil extérieur
CD changer jack
Jack para el cambiador de CD
Prise du changeur CD
External component
Componente exterior
Appareil extérieur
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
Miniclavija estéreo de 3,5 mm
Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm
* 9
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
* 9
Adaptador de entrada de línea KS-U57 (no suministrado con esta unidad)
* 9
Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet appareil)
* 10
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
* 10 Adaptador de entrada AUX KS-U58 (no suministrado con esta unidad)
* 10
Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
6
CD RECEIVER KD-SH1000
KD-SH1000
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0365-001A
[U/UH]
2
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION:
Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3.
CAUTION:
Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
Notice:
The display window built in this unit has been produced with high precision, but it may have some ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not malfunction.
How to reset your unit
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card first (see page 11).
1
2
•
If this does not work, reset your unit.
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in
“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).
Press briefly.
Press repeatedly.
Press either one.
Press
A
, then
B
.
Press and hold until your desired response begins.
Press and hold both buttons at the same time.
The following marks are used to indicate...
: Built-in CD player operations.
: External CD changer operations.
: SD player operations.
: External USB memory operations.
CONTENTS
Control panel ................................... 5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
............ 6
Getting started ................................. 7
Basic operations ............................................... 7
Radio operations .............................. 8
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations .................................... 11
Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 11
Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 11
Playing from an SD card .................................... 11
Playing from a USB memory ............................. 12
Sound adjustments ........................... 15
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 15
Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 16
Activating crossover network ........................... 18
Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 18
General settings — PSM ................... 20
Title assignment .............................. 23 iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24
Other external component operations ... 26
Maintenance .................................... 26
More about this unit ......................... 27
Troubleshooting ............................... 32
Specifications ................................... 36
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.
3
4
How to detach/attach the control panel
Detaching...
How to enter the various menus
The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,
PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).
• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds, menu screen is canceled.
1
2
Select a menu you want.
Attaching...
Time countdown indicator
3
Enter the selected menu.
How to change the control panel angle
• To go back to the previous screen or exit the MENU screen, press BACK repeatedly.
4
Operate as instructed on the screen.
• To go back to the MENU screen, press
MENU.
When using the remote controller
Caution:
How to change the display information and patterns
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
Source operation display Clock time display
Large graphic display (full display size) Small graphic display
Control panel
Parts identification
1
BAND button
2
SOURCE button
3
• Control dial
• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER button
4
MENU button
5
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
6
Display window
7
DISP (display) button
8
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
9
(angle) button p
0
(eject) button q
4
/
¢
buttons w
Remote sensor t
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
e
BACK button r
Reset button
(control panel release) button
5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
Caution:
6
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.
Main elements and features
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
2
SOURCE button
Selects the source.
3
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Changes the preset stations.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the folders.
•
While listening to an Apple iPod
®
or a
JVC D. player:
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
∞
.
– Enters the main menu with
5
.
(Now
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
work as the menu selecting buttons.) *
4
VOL (volume) + / – buttons
Adjusts the volume level.
5
Number buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Selects the preset station if pressed, or store a station if pressed and held.
• F
or CD/CD Text:
Selects the tracks.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Selects the folders.
•
For CD changer:
Selects the discs.
6
ANGLE button
Adjusts the control panel angle.
7
BAND button
Selects the band.
8
4
/
¢
buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Searches for stations if pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed and held.
•
For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the tracks if pressed, or fastforwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.
•
While listening to an iPod or a D. player
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
∞
to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
*
5
:
Returns to the previous menu.
∞
:
Confirms the selection.
Getting started
Activates or deactivates crossover network
(see page 18) before turning on the power.
Basic operations
~
Turn on the power.
Ÿ
FM/AM
=
CD
*
=
SD
*
=
USB
*
=
CD-CH
* /
iPod
* /
D. player
* (or
EXT-IN
)
=
LINE-IN
=
(back to the beginning)
*
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.
!
For FM/AM tuner
⁄
Adjust the volume.
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
Continued on the next page
7
8
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press it again.
To turn off the power
Radio operations
~
Ÿ
!
Start searching for a station.
Selected band appears.
Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
20 – 22.
1
2
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching,
press the same button again.
To tune in to a station manually
In step
!
above...
1
1
Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “Demo,” then “Off.”
2
Setting the clock
Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust the minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or
“12Hours.”
3
Finish the procedure.
2
Select a desired station frequency.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
To check the current clock time while the power is turned off
3
4
MO indicator lights up.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.
To restore the stereo effect,
repeat the same procedure and select “Off” in step
3
. The MO indicator goes off.
Tuning in to FM stations with strong signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-
Extreme)
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Memory)
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to store into.
2
3
FM station automatic presetting —
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
4
4
DX indicator goes off and LO indicator lights up.
Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be detected.
To tune in to all receivable stations,
repeat the same procedure and select “DX” in step
3
. The
LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights up.
2
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
1
3
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
• If you hold down
5
/
∞
, the Preset Station
List appears (go to step
6
).
Continued on the next page
9
10
4
5
1
Listening to a preset station
2
6
Select a preset number.
• You can move to the lists of the other FM bands by turning the control dial.
7
Store the station.
When using the remote controller
Directly select the preset number.
When using the remote controller
After tuning in to a station you want to preset...
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Playing from an SD card
Before detaching the control panel, turn off the power.
~
Ÿ
SD loading slot
To stop play and eject the disc
Note:
If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB” flashes on the display. If this happens, detach the USB memory, then, press
0
button again.
Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
*
If you have changed the external input setting to “Ext In” (see page 21), you cannot select the
CD changer.
SD card
Press in the SD card until you hear a clicking sound.
To eject the SD card,
press the SD card again.
• Press the SD card softly (do not release your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD card may pop out from the unit.
Continued on the next page
11
12
!
Attach the control panel.
Cautions:
• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory when it might hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all important data have been backed up to avoid losing the data.
⁄
• The control panel goes back to the previous position.
If an SD card or USB memory has been attached...
Playback starts automatically if tracks are recorded.
Playing from a USB memory
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a
USB memory.
All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.
~
Ÿ
USB input terminal
Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
• If a different SD card or USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.
About MP3 and WMA tracks
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
To fast-forward or reverse the track
USB memory
To detach the USB memory,
straightly pull it out from the unit.
To go to the next or previous tracks
4
Confirm the selection.
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3/WMA/SD/USB)
For MP3 tracks:
For WMA tracks:
The selected list appears on the display.
• You can move to the other list by turning the control dial.
5
Select a disc/folder/file from the list.
Current folder
• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List
( ) and Folder List ( / /
), see the following.
Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step
3
Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
If you select the current disc/folder
(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File
List appears.
6
Starts playback.
Other main functions
Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list
• This function is not available for an audio CD or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
When using the remote controller
• To directly select a disc ( )
• To directly select a track of an audio CD or a CD Text ( )
• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder
( / / )
To select a number from 1 – 6:
3
Select a list type.
To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):
*
1
Selectable only when the source is
“CD-CH.”
*
2
Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.
For MP3/WMA folders:
It is required that folders are assigned with
2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.
13
14
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
1
2
After making sure “No Eject?” is selected...
• “No Eject” flashes, and the disc cannot be ejected.
To cancel the prohibition,
repeat the same procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is selected.
• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
3
Select one of the items (see the following table)
.
Intro Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...
Track
: All tracks of the current playback media. [ ]
Folder
*
1
: First track of all folders of the current playback media. [ ]
Disc
* 2 : First track of all the inserted discs.
Off
[
: Cancels.
]
Repeat Plays repeatedly
Track
: The current track. [ ]
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder.
[ ]
Disc
*
2
: All tracks of the inserted discs.
Off
[
: Cancels.
]
Random Plays at random
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folder and so on.
[ ]
Disc
All
Off
*
3
: All tracks of the current disc.
[ ]
: All tracks of the inserted discs/ media. [ ]
: Cancels.
*
1
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/
USB).
* 2
Only when the source is CD-CH.
*
3
Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.
4
Finish the procedure.
Sound adjustments
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
You can create a more acoustic sound field such as in a theater, hall, etc.
• When crossover network (see page 18) is activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”
DSP modes
Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,
Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—
Karaoke.)
To make more precise settings,
see the following.
To cancel the acoustic effect,
select “Defeat” in step
Ÿ
.
Precise settings for the DSP modes
1
Select a DSP mode.
2
Select the number of the built-in speakers.
• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker number is fixed to “4ch.”
~
Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select one of the DSP modes.
3
Select your listening seat position.
•
To finish the procedure
•
To adjust the effect level
Go to step
!
.
For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect level is not adjustable.
!
Adjust the effect level.
4
Select the speaker to be adjusted.
*
Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step
2
.
•
To finish the procedure
Continued on the next page
15
16
5
Select the distance between the selected speaker and the seat.
3
Finish the procedure.
Once you have set the distance, it is memorized for each seat position selected in step
3
. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select the seat position.
To change the measuring unit
Using the equalizer—EQ
You can adjust the sound equalization patterns to your preference by using either Graphic EQ or Parametric EQ.
• Adjust the equalizer to match the reproducible frequency range of the connected speakers; otherwise, the adjustments may not be effective.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the
7 distance for the other speakers.
Finish the procedure.
Selecting preset sound modes—
Graphic EQ
Sound modes
Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B
(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,
Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Activating BBE Digital
BBE Digital is a digital processing method to restore the brilliance and clarity of the original live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach the ear than low frequency sounds.
BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship between the low, mid, and high frequencies by adding a progressively longer delay time to the low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.
1
Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).
2
Select the effect level.
3
Select a sound mode.
4
Finish the procedure.
Storing your own sound modes
1
Select a sound mode.
2
Select a frequency band.
3
Select a band.
Band1
: 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz
Band2
: 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz
Band3
: 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz
4
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected band.
3
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected frequency band.
5
Select the frequency.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other frequency bands.
5
6
Select one of the user modes.
• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each other. (Only selectable frequencies are shown on the display.)
6
Select the band width (Q).
7
Store the adjustments.
• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.
Then repeat steps
3
to
6
.
7
Finish the procedure.
Adjusting Parametric EQ
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Once you have made adjustments, it is memorized. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select Parametric EQ.
17
Activating crossover network
By activating crossover network, you can allocate different frequency range of sound signals to different speakers to match their characteristic.
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following:
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For 3-way network speaker system, see
Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).
You cannot perform other operations until you finish the following procedure.
While the power is turned off...
~
Ÿ
To cancel Crossover,
repeat the same procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?” appears on the display.
• indicator goes off.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.
~
Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select a setting item.
*
Appears only when crossover network is activated (see left column).
When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or
“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER to enter its submenu.
!
Adjust the selected setting item.
(See the following for details.)
• To adjust other SEL settings, press
BACK. Then repeat steps
Ÿ
and
!
.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
18
!
To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal
•
Fad (fader)
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
•
To cancel the procedure,
press and hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power turns off.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
• indicator lights up (in sequence with other indicators).
•
Bal (balance)
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
To adjust reproduced frequency level—X-Over
This setting is available only when crossover network (see page 18) is activated.
1
Select a filter.
To adjust subwoofer output—
S.woofer
1
Adjust the output level.
HPF
(Front/Rear)
: Frequencies lower than the selected level are cut-off.
LPF (Rear)
: Frequencies higher than the selected level are cut-off.
2
Select “On” to activate the selected filter.
• If you connect high-range speakers to
Front or Rear output, select “On” for the corresponding HPF to prevent the speakers from being damaged.
2
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected subwoofer.
3
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
3
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected speakers.
1.6kHz – 16.0kHz
: Front HPF and Rear LPF
31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz
: Rear HPF
4
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
To adjust the input level of each source—Vol Adj
This setting is required for each source except for FM.
Once an adjustment is made, it will be memorized. When you change the source the volume level will automatically increase or decrease according to the adjusted level.
1
Select a source before entering the SEL menu.
2
Adjust to match the input level to the FM sound level.
19
20
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.
1
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
2
Select a PSM item.
3
Select or adjust the selected PSM item.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.
5
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Demo
Display demonstration
Anime
Animation
Clock H
*
1
Hour adjustment
Clock M
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
Scroll
Dimmer
Items Settings, [reference page]
•
On
•
Off
[Initial] : Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].
: Cancels.
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
1
–
12
(
0
–
23
)
[Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]
: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power, change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.
: Cancels.
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
•
•
•
00
–
59
[Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]
: See also page 8 for setting.
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
12Hours
[Initial]
•
24Hours
•
Once
[Initial]
•
Auto
•
Off
Auto
[Initial]
Time Set
Off
On
: Scrolls the track information once.
: Repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).
: Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.
: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.
: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 22 for setting.
From: Any hour; To: Any hour
: Cancels.
: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)
Indications Items Settings, [reference page]
Bright
Display brightness
ID3 Tag
Tag display
•
•
1
–
10
[Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4“ takes no effect.)
On
Off
[Initial] : Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
: Cancels.
Theme
Display theme
IF Band
Intermediate frequency band
Beep
Key-touch tone
Ext In
*
2
External input
•
•
•
Large
(
1
[Initial] or
2
)
•
Small
(
1
[Initial] or
2
)
Auto
Wide
[Initial]
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 22 for setting.
: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 22 for setting.
: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
: Activates the key-touch tone.
: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
•
Changer
[Initial]
•
Ext In
: To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,
[24].
: To use any other external component, [26].
Tel
Telephone muting
•
Muting 1/
Muting 2
Amp Gain
Amplifier gain control
•
•
•
•
Off
High PWR
Low PWR
Off
[Initial]
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.
• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.
: Cancels.
: Volume 00 – Volume 50
: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)
: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
* 1
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
* 2
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.
21
22
Selecting timer for the dimmer
You can dim the display at night or as you set the timer.
1
Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu.
2
Select “Time Set.”
Selecting the graphic theme
You can select the graphic theme for large and small display sizes (see also page 5).
1
Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.
2
Select the size of the display.
3
Adjust the dimmer time.
1
Set the dimmer start time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
3
Select the theme.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the other display size and theme.
5
Finish the procedure.
2
Set the dimmer end time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
To show the selected display theme,
press
DISP repeatedly while playing a source.
4
Finish the procedure.
2
Select a character.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to station frequencies,
CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer) and the external components (LINE-IN and
EXT-IN).
3
Move to the next (or previous) character position.
Sources Maximum number of characters
Station frequencies
Up to 16 characters (up to 30 station frequencies including bothe FM and AM)
CDs/CD-CH * Up to 32 characters (up to 30 discs)
External component
Up to 16 characters
*
You cannot assign names to any discs other than conventional CDs.
1
Select the sources.
• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external component: Select
“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”
2
Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character set.
4
Repeat steps
1
and
3
until you finish entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
• To cancel the title entry without registration, press
MENU.
To erase the entire title
In step
3
...
A
(A – Z: upper case)
=
a
(a – z: lower case)
=
0
(numbers and symbols)
=
Á
(Accented letters: upper case)
=
á
(Accented letters: lower case)
=
(back to the beginning)
• For available characters, see page 31.
23
24
iPod®/D. player operations
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.
!
Adjust the volume.
Before operating your iPod or D. player:
Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.
•
Interface adapter for iPod
®
—KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.
•
D. player interface adapter
—KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.
To pause
* 1
or stop
* 2
playback
To resume playback, press it again.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
Caution:
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.
To go to the next or previous tracks
Preparations:
Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external input setting, see page 21.
~
*
1
For iPod
* 2
For D. player
Ÿ
Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused * 1 or stopped * 2 previously.
Selecting a track from the menu
1
Enter the main menu.
Selecting the playback modes
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
Now the
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
buttons work as the menu selecting buttons * .
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
–
If no operations are done for about
5 seconds.
–
When you confirm the selection of a track.
2
Select the desired menu.
3
Select an item (see table below).
4
Finish the procedure.
For iPod:
Playlists
Ô
Artists
Ô
Albums
Ô
Songs
Ô
Genres
Ô
Composers
Ô
(back to the beginning)
For D. player:
Playlist
Ô
Artist
Ô
Album
Ô
Genre
Ô
Track
Ô
(back to the beginning)
3
Confirm the selection.
To move back to the previous menu, press
5
.
• If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps
2
and
3
until the desired track is played.
• Holding
4
/
¢
can skip 10 items at a time.
Repeat play
One
All
Off
: Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Mode
=
One” for the D. player.
: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode
=
All” for the D. player.
: Cancels.
Random play
Album
* : Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
Song
/
On
: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Off
Songs” of the iPod or “Random
Play
=
On” of the D. player.
: Cancels.
*
For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums” of the main “MENU.”
25
26
Other external component operations
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input
Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input
Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see pages 11 – 14; For iPod, or D.player, see pages
24 and 25.
~
Connector
LINE-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
LINE IN plugs.
EXT-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
CD changer jack.
If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 21 and select the external input (“Ext In”).
Ÿ
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
!
Adjust the volume.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its case,
press down the center holder of the case and lift the disc out, holding it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the
Center holder edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case,
gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
To keep discs clean
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
How to handle SD card
SD cards are precision products. DO NOT impact, bend, drop, or wet them.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Stick-on label
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
Continued on the next page
27
28
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.
• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been assigned to the audio CD (see page 23), it will be shown on the display.
• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/
WMA track, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down, the control panel moves down, and the disc automatically ejects from the loading slot.
• If you keep the control panel open for about
1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep” setting is turned “On”—see page 21) the control panel returns to its previous position.
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with “Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.
Playing an MP3/WMA discs
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,
1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.
• The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo * : up to 128 (72) characters
– Joliet * : up to 64 (36) characters
– Windows long file name * : up to 128 (72) characters
*
The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is
313 or more.
• This unit can play back the files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a
USB memory
• While playing from an SD card or a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some
SD cards or USB memories due to their characteristics or recording conditions.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing some buttons on the control panel.
• If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, “No Files” appears and the unit returns to the previous source.
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
• For SD card: The maximum number of characters for folder name is 8 characters; file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot recognize folder with period (.) on the folder name.
For USB memory: The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.
• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of
255 files and 63 folders.
For USB memory: This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)
Continued on the next page
29
30
Sound adjustments
Selecting the DSP modes—DSP
• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the recording condition of the sources:
– Monaural sources such as AM and monaural FM broadcasting programs.
– Multiplex sound sources.
– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a chorus, or only a few instruments.
• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are used only to reproduce reflections and reverberations in order to creates a beingthere feeling in your car compartment.
• If fader or balance has been set close to its extreme, appropriate effect may not be obtained.
• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker number when “Defeat” is selected with crossover network activated.
Storing your own sound modes
• If you do not want to store your current adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment to the current playback source, press MENU to go back to the operation screen of the current source. Adjustment you made remains effective until you select a sound mode.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to the center.
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.
• You cannot change the input level—
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to adjust it.
General settings — PSM
• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than
“Auto.”
• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc in the unit and vise versa.
iPod® or D. player operations
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
D. player is charged through this unit.
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all operations from the iPod or D. player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or
D. player and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than
16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 20). This unit can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:
For iPod users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>
For D. player users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>
Available characters
In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.
Accented letters: upper case Numbers and symbols
Accented letters: lower case
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User 1
User 2
User 3
Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode
Sound mode
Preset equalizing value
63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz
00 00 00 00
+06 +06 +04 +02
00
00
00
00
00
+02
00
+04
00
+02
+06 +04 +04 +04
00 +04 +02 00
00
00
+02
+02
+02
+02
+02
+02
+06
+04
+06 +04 +02 +02 +02 +02 +02 +06 +04
00
00
00
+08 +04 +02
+04 +02 00
00
00
+06 +02 00 00
+04 +06 +04 +02
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
–04 –02
00 00
+02 +04 +04 +04 +06
00 00 +02 +04 00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
+02 +02
+02 +04
00
00
00
00
00
00
31
32
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “Connect Error” appears on the display.
• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the control panel movement is freezed.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach it again (see pages 4 and 26).
Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the installation.
Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
Connect the antenna firmly.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped.
Insert the disc correctly.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for recording.
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.
• Unlock the disc (see page 14).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading
Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).
Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
Symptoms
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Noise is generated.
• A longer readout time is required (“File
Check” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have intended them to play.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “No Music” appears on the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
• Noise is generated.
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then returns to the previous source.
Remedies/Causes
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.
Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 31).
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• Readout time varies depending on the device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an appropriate format.
The track is unplayable.
• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted correctly.
The files included in the device are corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the display.
Continued on the next page
33
34
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display while playing tracks from an SD card.
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
• “No Disc” appears on the display.
• “No Magazine” appears on the display.
Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the device.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try again.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 31).
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press the reset button of the CD changer.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes than “Defeat.”
• Only high range sound or low range sound is reproduced though full range speakers are connected.
• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does not work.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Deactivate crossover network (see page 18).
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
• Buttons do not work as intended.
• The sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display.
• Playback stops.
The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press
POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/
D. player.
Check the connecting cable and its connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart the playback operation using the control panel (see page
24).
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• No sound can be heard when connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard.
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when connecting a D. player.
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/
D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work after disconnecting from this unit.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod or D. player.
•
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
SD logo is a trademark.
•
Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.
Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.
•
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
35
36
Specifications
Maximum Power
Output:
Continuous Power
Output (RMS):
Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control
Range:
Other Terminals:
Front/Rear: 50 W per channel
Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Frequencies:
Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz
(9 bands)
Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,
100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,
1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)
Level: ±10 dB
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Frequency Response:
Signal to Noise Ratio:
Level/Impedance: Line-In:
Line-Out:
Output Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
70 dB
1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
LINE IN, CD changer
Frequency Range: FM:
AM:
FM Tuner Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
AM Tuner
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
30 dB
20 μV/65 dB
Type:
Signal Detection
System:
Number of Channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
Compact disc player
Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
98 dB
102 dB
Less than measurable limit
MP3:
WMA:
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
MP3:
WMA:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 320 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
FAT 12/16
8 MB – 512 MB
MP3/WMA
8 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 192 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
Max. Current:
MP3:
WMA:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
FAT 12/16/32
Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
MP3/WMA
Less than 500 mA
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
5 kbps – 320 kbps
8 kHz – 48 kHz
Power Requirement:
Grounding System:
Operating Voltage:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):
Panel Size (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
0°C to +40°C
182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
1.7 k g (excluding accessories)
37
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN, TH
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0206DTSMDTJEIN
KD-SH1000
Installation/Connection Manual
°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß/§ŸË¡◊Õ°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß
GET0365-006A
[U/UH]
0206DTSMDTJEIN
EN, TH
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH
‰∑¬
This unit is designed to operate on
12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems
. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ȉ¥È√—∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æ◊ËÕ„™Èß“π°—∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øøÈ“ “¬¥‘π¢—È«≈∫°√–· µ√ß
12
‚«≈∑Ï À“°√∂¬πµÏ¢Õߧÿ≥‰¡Ë‰
¥È„™È√–∫∫π’È µÈÕß„™È‡§√◊ËÕß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™Ë«¬ ´÷Ëß “¡“√∂À“´◊ÈÕ‰¥È®“°√È“π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC
WARNINGS
§”‡µ◊Õπ
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π°“√‡°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√ ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȪ≈¥¢—È«·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë≈∫ÕÕ° ·≈È«®÷ßµËÕ “¬‰ø°ËÕ𵑥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕß
•
µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“‰¥È‡¥‘𠓬¥‘πµËÕ√–À«Ë“߇§√◊ËÕß°—∫µ—«∂—ß √∂¬πµÏ„À¡Ë·≈È«À≈—ß®“°µ‘¥µ—Èß
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of
4
Ω
to 8
Ω ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
À¡“¬‡Àµÿ:
•
„™Èæ‘°—¥®”‡æ“–·∑πøî« À“°øî« Ï¢“¥∫ËÕ¬ „ÀȪ√÷°…“√È“ π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ
JVC
•
¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȵËÕ≈”‚æß ∑’Ë¡’°”≈—ߢ—∫ ß ÿ¥‡°‘π°«Ë“
50 W
(∑—ÈߥȓπÀπÈ“·≈–¥È“πÀ≈—ß ¡’§Ë“§«“¡µÈ“π∑“π
4
Ω
∂÷ß
8
Ω
)
∂È“°”≈—ߢ—∫µË”°«Ë“
50 W
„Àȇª≈’ˬπ§Ë“
“Amp Gain”
‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π‰¡Ë„ÀÈ≈”‚æß™”√ÿ¥ (¥ŸÀπÈ“
21
§”·π–π”)
•
°“√ªÈÕß°—π°“√≈—¥«ß®√ ®–µÈÕßæ—π¢—È« “¬µ–°—Ë«
∑’ˉ¡Ë„™È·≈È«
¥È«¬‡∑ ªæ—𠓬‰ø
•
·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ®–√ÈÕπ¡“°À≈—ß®“°„™È √–¡—¥√–«—ßլ˓‰ª —¡º— ‡¡◊ËÕ∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È
Heat sink
·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß
”À√—∫°“√µËÕ·À≈Ë߮˓¬°”≈—ß·≈–≈”‚æß:
•
լ˓µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢È“°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµÏ ¡‘©–π—Èπ ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥È√—∫§«“¡‡ ’¬À“¬¡“°
•
°ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢È“°—∫≈”‚æß „Àȵ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥‘𠓬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧÿ≥„Àȇ√’¬∫√ÈÕ¬‡ ’¬°ËÕπ
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.
√“¬°“√ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√—∫µ‘¥µ—Èß·≈–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—π
Ë«πª√–°Õ∫µËÕ‰ªπ’È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È À“°¡’ ‘Ëß„¥‰¡Ë§√∫ °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“µ—«·∑π®”ÀπË“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ßµ‘¥√∂¬πµÏ
JVC
‚¥¬∑—π∑’
A
/
B
Hard case/Control panel
≈—ß∫√√®ÿ/ÀπÈ“ª—¥
C
Sleeve
ª≈Õ°ÀÿÈ¡
D
Trim plate
·ºËπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µËß
E
Power cord
“¬‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ß
I
Rubber cushion
¬“ß°—π°√–·∑°
F
Washer (ø5)
ª√–‡°Áπ«ß·À«π (ø5)
J
Handles
§—π∫—ߧ—∫
1
G
Lock nut (M5)
πÕµ≈ÁÕ§ (M5)
K
Remote controller
√’‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈
H
Mounting bolt (M5
×
20 mm)
≈—°µ‘¥ (
M5
×
20
¡¡.)
L
Battery
·∫µ‡µÕ√
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπÈ“ª—∑¡Ï‡¢È“)
¿“æµ—«Õ¬Ë“ßµËÕ‰ªπ’È· ¥ß∂÷ß°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß·∫∫∑—Ë«‰ª À“°§ÿ≥¡’ª—≠À“À√◊ÕµÈÕß°“√¢ÈÕ¡Ÿ≈‡°’ˬ«°—∫™ÿ¥µ‘¥µ—Èß °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“°—∫ºŸÈ¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’
¬ß√∂¬πµÏ
JVC
¢Õß∑Ë“πÀ√◊Õ∫√‘…—
• ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂È“§ÿ≥‰¡Ë·πË„®«Ë“µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë „ÀÈÀ“™Ë“ߺŸÈ‡™’ˬ«™“≠‡ªÁπºŸÈµ‘¥µ—Èß
Do the required electrical connections.
µËÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑’Ë°”À𥉫È∑—ÈßÀ¡¥
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.
ßÕ·ºËπ‡æ◊ËÕ¬÷¥ª≈Õ°„ÀȵËÕ°—π‡¢È“∑’Ë
*
1
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
* 1 ‡¡◊ËÕ§ÿ≥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫¢÷Èπ √–«—ßլ˓∑”„ÀÈø‘« Ï∫√‘‡«≥ Ë«π∑È“¬‡ ’¬À“¬
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
*
2
Fit the protrusions outside the unit.
* 2 µ‘¥µ—Èß≈Ë«π∑’ˬ◊ËπÕÕ°¡“∑’˥ȓππÕ°‡§√◊ËÕß
°“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫
°ËÕπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „ÀȪ≈¥ÀπÈ“µ—¥ Ë«π∑È“¬°ËÕπ
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
„ ˧—π∫—ߧ—∫ 2 Õ—π≈ß„π√ËÕß ”À√—∫„™Èæ—π≈«¥
¥—ß¿“æ ®“°π—Èπ „Àȇ≈◊ËÕπ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ° „π¢≥–
∑’˧ËÕ¬ Ê ¥÷ߧ—π∫—ߧ—∫∑—Èß Õß Õ—πÕÕ°®“°°—π
When using the optional stay /
‡¡◊ËÕ„™Èµ—«¬÷¥·∫∫‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È
Fire wall
ºπ—ß°—π‰ø
Stay (option)
µ—«¬÷¥ (‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È)
Dashboard
·ºßÀπÈ“ª—∑¡á
Screw (option)
°√Ÿ (‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È)
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑’Ë¡ÿ¡µË”°«Ë“
30˚
Õß»“
Caution when installing /
¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—߇¡◊ËÕ∑”°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß
When installing the unit without using the sleeve /
‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡Ë„™Èª≈Õ°ÀÿÈ¡
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
µ—«Õ¬Ë“߇™Ëπ „π√∂¬πµÏ‚µ‚¬µÈ“ „ÀÈ∂Õ¥«‘∑¬ÿµ‘¥√∂¬πµÏÕÕ°°ËÕπ ·≈ô«®÷ßµ‘¥µíô߇§√◊ËÕßπ’ô‡¢ô“·∑π∑’Ë
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm)
* 3
°√ŸÀ—«‡√’¬∫ ( M5 × 8 ¡¡.
)
* 3
* 3 Not supplied for this unit.
* 3
‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È
Bracket
* 3
·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫
* 3
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm) * 3
°√ŸÀ—«‡√’¬∫ ( M5 × 8 ¡¡.
) * 3
°–‡ª“–
Bracket * 3
·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫
*
3
Note :
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
À¡“¬‡Àµ
:
‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫‰«È „ÀÈ„™È °√Ÿ¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂È“„™È °√Ÿ¬“«°«Ë“π’ÈÕ“®∑”„ÀÈ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥ô
Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.
• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).
µ‘¥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕ߇¢È“„πª≈Õ°ÀÿÈ¡ „Àȵ√ß°—∫¢Õ∫¢Õß ·ºËπ∑’˵—¥·µËß∑—Èß ’Ë
• ÀÈ“¡¥—π∑’Ë·ºß§«∫§ÿ¡ ( Ë«π∑’Ë√–∫“¬ ’„π√Ÿª)
2
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡‚¥¬„™È ‰øøÈ“
A
Typical connections /
°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ·∫∫ª°µ
Before connecting:
Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
°ËÕ•∑”°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥‘•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÏլ˓ߕ–¡—¥•–«—լ˓„ÀȺ‘¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ™ÿ¥ª•–°Õ•™ÿ¥•’
°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕº‘¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„Àȇ°‘¥§«“¡‡†’¬À“¬•È“¬·•ß°—•™ÿ¥ª•–
°Õ••’ȉ¥È“•µ–°—Ë«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕÿª°••ÏµËÕ‡™•ËÕ¡®“°µ—«• ß••Õ“®¡’’ ∑’ˉ¡Ë‡À¡•Õ•°—
1
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2
Connect the antenna cord.
3
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
1
µËÕ “¬‰ø ’µ“¡≈”¥—∫∑’Ë√–∫ÿ„π√Ÿª¥È“π≈Ë“ß
2
‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫“¬Õ“°“»
3
ÿ¥∑È“¬ µËÕ Ë«π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥‘𠓬‰ø‡¢È“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π’È
If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car,
see diagram for speaker connection.
À“°µ‘¥µ—Èß√–∫∫≈”‚æß “¡∑‘»∑“ß„π√∂¬πµÏ ¢Õ„ÀÈ¥Ÿ·ºπº—ß „π°“√µËÕ≈”‚æߥȫ¬
To subwoofer (see diagram )
™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√Ï (¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ )
Antenna connector
∑’˵ËÕ ”À√—∫ “¬Õ“°“»
LINE IN
(see diagram
/
(¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ )
Rear ground terminal
®ÿ¥‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ “¬¥‘π¥È“πÀ≈—ß
Line out (see diagram )
“¬ÕÕ° (¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ )
To external components (see diagram )
™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° (¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ )
* 4 Not supplied for this unit.
*
4 ‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ô
* 5 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.
* 5
°ËÕπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È°ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µ‘¥µ—Èß
µÈÕßµËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«π’È°ËÕπ ¡‘©–π—Èπ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥
Black
’¥”
Yellow * 5
’‡À≈◊Õß * 5
Red
’·¥ß
15 A fuse
ø‘« Ï¢π“¥ 15 A
Ignition switch
«‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥
To metallic body or chassis of the car
µËÕ°—∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√◊Õ‡™ ´‘ ¢Õß√∂¬πµá
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
µËÕ°—∫¢—È«∑’Ë¡’°√–· ‰øøÈ“„π·ºßø‘« Ï ´÷ËßµËÕ°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµ
(‚¥¬‰¡ËµÈÕß„™È «‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥) ( 12 ‚«≈∑ϧß∑’Ë)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
µËÕ°—∫¢—È« Ë«πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø‘«
Fuse block
·ºßø‘«
Blue
»’øÈ“
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øøÈ“Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘ À“°¡’ (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥
250 mA
)
Blue with white stripe
’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫Õª°√≥ÏÕË◊π (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 200 mA
)
Orange with white stripe
’ È¡·∂∫¢“« To car light control switch
«‘µ´Ï§«∫§ÿ¡‰ø¢Õß√∂¬πµ√Ï
Brown
’πÈ”µ“≈
To cellular phone system
µËÕ°—∫‚∑√»—æ∑χ§≈◊ËÕπ∑’Ë
White with black stripe
’¢“«·∂∫¥”
White
’¢“«
Gray with black stripe
’‡∑“·∂∫¥”
Left speaker (front)
≈”‚æß´È“¬ (ÀπÈ“)
Gray
’‡∑“
Green with black stripe
’‡¢’¬«·∂∫¥”
Right speaker (front)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (ÀπÈ“)
Green
’‡¢’¬«
Purple with black stripe
’¡Ë«ß·∂∫¥”
Left speaker (rear)
≈”‚æß´È“¬ (À≈—ß)
Purple
’¡Ë«ß
Right speaker (rear)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈—ß)
3
ENGLISH
‰∑¬
B
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer /
µËÕ·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï·≈–
/
À√◊Õ´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√ϥȓππÕ°
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.
• For amplifier only:
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit.
§ÿ≥ “¡“√∂µËÕ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ω¥ÈÀ≈“¬µ—«‡æ◊ËÕ‡æ‘Ë¡§ÿ≥¿“æ‡ ’¬ß„ÀÈ°—∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‘‚Õ„π√∂¬πµÏ
• µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«√–¬–‰°≈ ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢È“°—∫ “¬µ–°—Ë«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊Ëπ Ê ‡æ◊ËÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§ÿ¡‚¥¬™ÿ¥ª√–
°Õ∫π’ȉ¥È
•
≈”À√—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√χ∑Ë“π—Èπ:
–
∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°®“°™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È ·≈È««µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬ ∑‘Èß“¬µ–°—Ë«≈”‚æߢÕß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ȉ«
–
∑Ë“π “¡“√∂ª‘¥·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï ∑’˵‘¥µ—ÈßÕ¬ŸË„π‡§√◊ËÕß ·≈È« Ëß —≠≠“≥‡ ’¬ß‰ª¬—ß ·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï¿“¬πÕ°
‡æ’¬ßլ˓߇¥’¬«‰¥È ‡æ◊ËÕ„Àȇ ’¬ß∑’ˉ¥È§¡™—¥ ·≈–ªÈÕß°—π‡§√◊ËÕ߉¡Ë„ÀÈ√ÈÕπ (¥ŸÀπÈ“
21
§”·π–π”)
–
≈—≠≠“≥ÕÕ°®“°‡§√◊ËÕß®–¬—ߧßÕ¬ŸË„π√–¥—∫≈Ÿß ‡æ◊ËÕ„Àȇ≈’¬ß∑’ˉ¥È‡ªÁπ‡≈’¬ß‰Œ-‰ø ‡¡◊ËÕµËÕ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï¿“¬πÕ°
„Àª‘¥ªÿË¡§«∫§ÿ¡Õ—µ√“¢¬“¬ ∑’Ë·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï¿“¬πÕ° ‡æ◊ËÕ„Àȇ§√◊ËÕß¡’ª√–≈‘∑∏‘¿“æ°“√∑”ß“π≈Ÿß≈ÿ¥È
Remote lead
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°•
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°• ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«)
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
¢ÈÕµËÕ√Ÿªµ—«
Y
(‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
To the remote lead of other equipment or auto antenna if any
µËÕ “¬°—∫Õÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊ËπÀ√◊Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘∂È“¡’
JVC Amplifier
‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡
’¬ß
JVC
Subwoofer
´—∫«Ÿ‡øÕ√
Rear speakers
≈”‚æßÀ≈—ß
JVC Amplifier
‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡ ’¬ß
JVC
Front speakers
≈”‚æßÀπÈ“
Front speakers
≈”‚æßÀπÈ“
JVC Amplifier
‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡ ’¬ß
JVC
*
1 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 1
µËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π„ÀÈ·πËπ‡¢È“°—∫µ—«∂—߇À≈Á° À√◊Õµ—«∂—ß√∂µ√ß Ë«π∑’ˉ¡Ë¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫ (À“°¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫Õ¬ŸË „ÀÈ¢Ÿ¥ ’ÕÕ°°ËÕπ °ËÕπµËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π) À“°‰¡ËªØ‘∫—µ‘µ“¡§”·π–π”π’È ‡§√◊ËÕßÕ“®™”√ÿ¥À√◊Õ‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥È
* 2
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 2
“¬‡§‡∫‘≈ —≠≠“≥ (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
4
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª—≠À“¢—¥¢ÈÕß
•
ø‘« Ï¢“¥
*
¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’¥”·≈– ’·¥ßլ˓ß∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
•
‰¡Ë “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥È
*
¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’‡À≈◊ÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
•
‰¡Ë¡’‡ ’¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß
*
“¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
•
‡ ’¬ß‡æ’Ȭπ
*
“¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
*
“¬¢—È«≈∫
“–”
¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬·≈–¢«“µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
•
‡ ’¬ß√∫°«π
*
¡’°“√„™È “¬ —ÈπÊ À√◊ÕÀπ“Ê µËÕ®“°‡§√◊ËÕß «π∑’˵‘¥µ—Èß ‰«È∫πæ◊Èπ¥È“πÀ≈—ß°—∫µ—«∂—ß√∂¬πµÏÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
•
™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√ÈÕπ¢÷Èπ
*
“¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
*
“¬¢—È«≈∫
“–”
¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬·≈–¢«“µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
•
‡§√◊ËÕß√—∫π’È∑”ß“π‰¡
*
∑Ë“π‰¥Èµ—È߇§√◊ËÕß„À¡Ë·≈È«À√◊Õ¬—ß
C
Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system /
°“√µËÕ≈”‚æß ”À√—∫√–∫∫≈”‚æß “¡∑‘»∑“ß
You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3-way network speaker system
(high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).
§ÿ≥ “¡“√∂‡æ≈‘¥‡æ≈‘π°—∫‚≈°¢Õß “√–∫∫‡ ’¬ß ¡∫Ÿ√≥Ï·∫∫” „π√∂¬πµÏ‰¥È ¥È«¬°“√µËÕ√–∫∫≈”‚æß “¡∑‘»∑“ß
(æ‘ —¬ Ÿß/æ‘ —¬°≈“ß/´—∫«øŸ‡Õ√)
IMPORTANT:
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following.
• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for
HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For details about the setting, see pages 18 and 19 of the INSTRUCTIONS.
¢ÈÕ§«√∑√“∫∑’Ë ”§—≠:
À“°µ‘¥µ—Èß√–∫∫≈”‚æß “¡∑‘»∑“ß„π√∂¬πµÏ ¢Õ„ÀÈ¥Ÿ®ÿ¥µËÕ‰ªπ’È„ÀÈ¥’
•
°“√µËÕ “¬√–∫∫≈”‚æßµ“¡√Ÿª
• °ËÕπ„™Èß“π√–∫∫ ¢Õ„Àȇª‘¥√–∫∫¢È“¡‡§√◊բ˓¬ ·≈–µ—Èߧ≈◊Ë𧫓¡∂’˵—¥ ”À√—∫ HPF/LPF °ËÕπ (‚¥¬‡©æ“– ”À√—∫ HPF )
‰¡Ë‡™Ëππ—Èπ≈”‚æßÕ“®‡ ’¬‰¥È
•
¥Ÿ√“¬≈–‡Õ’¬¥„π°“√µ—Èߧ˓‰¥È„π§ŸË¡◊Õ°“√„™Èß“πÀπÈ“
18 – 19
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output
‡¡◊ËÕ®–µËÕ≈”‚æß (æ‘ —¬ Ÿß/æ‘ —¬°≈“ß)ºË“π¢—È« Ëß —≠≠“≥ÕÕ°≈”‚æß
White
’¢“«
Left high-range speaker
≈”‚æßæ‘ í¬ Ÿß¥È“π´È“¬
White with black stripe
’¢“«·∂∫¥”
Left mid-range speaker
≈”‚æßæ‘ í¬°≈“ߥȓπ´ô“¬
Green
’‡¢’¬«
Green with black stripe
’‡¢’¬«·∂∫¥”
Gray
’‡∑“
Gray with black stripe
’‡∑“·∂∫¥”
Purple
’¡Ë«ß
Purple with black stripe
’¡Ë«ß·∂∫¥”
Connecting subwoofer /
°“√µËÕ™—∫«Ÿ‡øÕ√
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°• ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«)
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
¢ÈÕµËÕ√Ÿªµ—« Y (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
Remote lead
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°•
JVC Amplifier
‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡ ’¬ß
JVC
To subwoofer out
™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß —
≠≠“≥ÕÕ°®“°´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√Ï
To LINE OUT (REAR)
™ËÕ߇ ¬∫µËÕ¢Õß LINE OUT ( REAR )
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to obtain more powerful sound
‡¡◊ËÕ®–µÈÕßµËÕ≈”‚æß (æ‘ —¬ Ÿß/æ‘ —¬°≈“ß)ºË“π‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡ ’¬ß¿“¬πÕ° ó‡æ◊ËÕ„Àȇ ’¬ß∑’ˉ¥È¡’æ≈—ß¡“°¢÷Èπ
JVC Amplifier
‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡
’¬ß
JVC
JVC Amplifier
‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡
’¬ß
JVC
To LINE OUT (FRONT)
™ËÕ߇ ¬∫µËÕ¢Õß LINE OUT ( FRONT )
Left high-range speaker
≈”‚æßæ‘ í¬ Ÿß¥È“π´È“¬
Right high-range speaker
≈”‚æßæ‘ í¬ Ÿß¥È“π¢«“
Left mid-range speaker
≈”‚æßæ‘ í¬°≈“ߥȓπ´ô“¬
Right mid-range speaker
≈”‚æßæ‘ í¬°≈“ß¥È“π¢«“
Right high-range speaker
≈”‚æßæ‘ í¬ Ÿß¥È“π¢«“
Right mid-range speaker
≈”‚æßæ‘ í¬°≈“ß¥È“π¢«“
Subwoofer
´—∫«øŸ‡Õ√
* 3
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 3
µËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π„ÀÈ·πËπ‡¢È“°—∫µ—«∂—߇À≈Á° À√◊Õµ—«∂—ß√∂ µ√ß Ë«π∑’ˉ¡Ë¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫ (À“°¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫Õ¬ŸË „ÀÈ¢Ÿ¥ ’ÕÕ°°ËÕπ °ËÕπµËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π) À“°‰¡ËªØ‘∫—µ‘µ“¡§”·π–π”π’È ‡§√◊ËÕßÕ“®™”√ÿ¥
À√◊Õ‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥È
* 4
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 4
“¬‡§‡∫‘≈ —≠≠“≥ (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
5
D
Connecting the external components /
°“√µËÕ‡æ‘Ë¡‡µ‘¡‡¢È“°—∫Õÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊ËπÊ
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD
‡™π‡®Õ√Ï,
Apple iPod
®
À√◊Õ‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ
JVC D.
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) /
µ—Èߧ˓
“Changer”
‡ªìπ°“√§Ë“√—∫ —≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° (¥ŸÀπÈ“
21
§”·π–π” )
You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod *
5
or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).
∑Ë“π “¡“√∂µËÕÕÿª°√≥Ï¥—ß°≈Ë“«µ“¡¿“æ· ¥ß¥È“π≈Ë“ß
∑Ë“π “¡“√∂‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ iPod * 5
À√◊Õ‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ
D.
‚¥¬„™ÈÕ‘π‡∑Õ√χø Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï (‰¡Ë¡’¡“„ÀÈ)
—KS-PD100
( ”À√—∫ iPod
) À√◊Õ
KS-PD500
( ”À√—∫‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ
D.
)
CAUTION /
¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
•
°ËÕπ®–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° °√ÿ≥“µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“ªî¥‡§√◊ËÕßÕ¬ŸË
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (·¬°®”ÀπË“¬) or
À√◊Õ
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ JVC D.
(·¬°®”ÀπË“¬)
JVC CD changer
JVC CD
‡™π‡®Õ√Ï
CD changer jack
™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß
‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ
CD
*
5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
*
5 iPod ‡ªÁπ‡§√◊ËÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§È“¢Õß Apple Computer, Inc .
´÷Ëß®¥∑–‡∫’¬π°“√§È“„πª√–‡∑» À√—∞Õ‡¡√‘°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»Õ◊ËπÊ
*
6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer
*
6 µËÕ “¬∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“ ”À√—∫
CD
‡™π‡®Õ√Ï
Other external component /
Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°Õ◊ËπÊ
• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) /
µ—Èߧ˓
“Ext In”
‡∫ªìπ°“√§Ë“√—∫ —≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° (¥ŸÀπÈ“
21
§”·π–π”)
External component
Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°
CD changer jack
™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß
‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ CD
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
¢—È«‡ ’¬∫¡‘π‘ ‡µÕ√‘‚Õ¢π“¥ 3.5 ¡¡.
External component
Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°
External component
Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°
*
7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
*
7 Õ·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï “¬ —≠≠“≥‡¢È“ KS-U57 (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
*
8 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
*
8 Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï√—∫ —≠≠“≥ AUX √ÿËπ KS-U58 (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
* 9 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 9 “¬‡§‡∫‘≈ —≠≠“≥ (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
6
CD RECEIVER
ALAT PENERIMA CD
KD-SH1000
KD-SH1000
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 8.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.
INSTRUCTIONS
BUKU PETUNJUK
GET0365-004A
[UN]
2
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION:
Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3.
CAUTION:
Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
Notice:
The display window built in this unit has been produced with high precision, but it may have some ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not malfunction.
How to reset your unit
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card first (see page 11).
1
2
•
If this does not work, reset your unit.
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in
“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).
Press briefly.
Press repeatedly.
Press either one.
Press
A
, then
B
.
Press and hold until your desired response begins.
Press and hold both buttons at the same time.
The following marks are used to indicate...
: Built-in CD player operations.
: External CD changer operations.
: SD player operations.
: External USB memory operations.
CONTENTS
Control panel ................................... 5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
............ 6
Getting started ................................. 7
Basic operations ............................................... 7
Radio operations .............................. 8
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations .................................... 11
Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 11
Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 11
Playing from an SD card .................................... 11
Playing from a USB memory ............................. 12
Sound adjustments ........................... 15
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 15
Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 16
Activating crossover network ........................... 18
Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 18
General settings — PSM ................... 20
Title assignment .............................. 23 iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24
Other external component operations ... 26
Maintenance .................................... 26
More about this unit ......................... 27
Troubleshooting ............................... 32
Specifications ................................... 36
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.
3
4
How to detach/attach the control panel
Detaching...
How to enter the various menus
The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,
PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).
• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds, menu screen is canceled.
1
2
Select a menu you want.
Attaching...
Time countdown indicator
3
Enter the selected menu.
How to change the control panel angle
• To go back to the previous screen or exit the MENU screen, press BACK repeatedly.
4
Operate as instructed on the screen.
• To go back to the MENU screen, press
MENU.
When using the remote controller
Caution:
How to change the display information and patterns
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
Source operation display Clock time display
Large graphic display (full display size) Small graphic display
Control panel
Parts identification
1
BAND button
2
SOURCE button
3
• Control dial
• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER button
4
MENU button
5
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
6
Display window
7
DISP (display) button
8
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
9
(angle) button p
0
(eject) button q
4
/
¢
buttons w
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
e
BACK button r
Reset button t
(control panel release) button
5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
Caution:
6
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.
Main elements and features
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
2
SOURCE button
Selects the source.
3
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Changes the preset stations.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the folders.
•
While listening to an Apple iPod
®
or a
JVC D. player:
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
∞
.
– Enters the main menu with
5
.
(Now
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
work as the menu selecting buttons.) *
4
VOL (volume) + / – buttons
Adjusts the volume level.
5
Number buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Selects the preset station if pressed, or store a station if pressed and held.
• F
or CD/CD Text:
Selects the tracks.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Selects the folders.
•
For CD changer:
Selects the discs.
6
ANGLE button
Adjusts the control panel angle.
7
BAND button
Selects the band.
8
4
/
¢
buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Searches for stations if pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed and held.
•
For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the tracks if pressed, or fastforwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.
•
While listening to an iPod or a D. player
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
∞
to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
*
5
:
Returns to the previous menu.
∞
:
Confirms the selection.
Getting started
Activates or deactivates crossover network
(see page 18) before turning on the power.
Basic operations
~
Turn on the power.
Ÿ
FM/AM
=
CD
*
=
SD
*
=
USB
*
=
CD-CH
* /
iPod
* /
D. player
* (or
EXT-IN
)
=
LINE-IN
=
(back to the beginning)
*
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.
!
For FM/AM tuner
⁄
Adjust the volume.
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
Continued on the next page
7
8
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press it again.
To turn off the power
Radio operations
~
Ÿ
!
Start searching for a station.
Selected band appears.
Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
20 – 22.
1
2
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching,
press the same button again.
To tune in to a station manually
In step
!
above...
1
1
Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “Demo,” then “Off.”
2
Setting the clock
Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust the minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or
“12Hours.”
3
Finish the procedure.
2
Select a desired station frequency.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
To check the current clock time while the power is turned off
3
4
MO indicator lights up.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.
To restore the stereo effect,
repeat the same procedure and select “Off” in step
3
. The MO indicator goes off.
Tuning in to FM stations with strong signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-
Extreme)
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Memory)
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to store into.
2
3
FM station automatic presetting —
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
4
4
DX indicator goes off and LO indicator lights up.
Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be detected.
To tune in to all receivable stations,
repeat the same procedure and select “DX” in step
3
. The
LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights up.
2
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
1
3
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
• If you hold down
5
/
∞
, the Preset Station
List appears (go to step
6
).
Continued on the next page
9
10
4
5
1
Listening to a preset station
2
6
Select a preset number.
• You can move to the lists of the other FM bands by turning the control dial.
7
Store the station.
When using the remote controller
Directly select the preset number.
When using the remote controller
After tuning in to a station you want to preset...
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Playing from an SD card
Before detaching the control panel, turn off the power.
~
Ÿ
SD loading slot
To stop play and eject the disc
Note:
If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB” flashes on the display. If this happens, detach the USB memory, then, press
0
button again.
Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
*
If you have changed the external input setting to “Ext In” (see page 21), you cannot select the
CD changer.
SD card
Press in the SD card until you hear a clicking sound.
To eject the SD card,
press the SD card again.
• Press the SD card softly (do not release your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD card may pop out from the unit.
Continued on the next page
11
12
!
Attach the control panel.
Cautions:
• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory when it might hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all important data have been backed up to avoid losing the data.
⁄
• The control panel goes back to the previous position.
If an SD card or USB memory has been attached...
Playback starts automatically if tracks are recorded.
Playing from a USB memory
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a
USB memory.
All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.
~
Ÿ
USB input terminal
Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
• If a different SD card or USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.
About MP3 and WMA tracks
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
To fast-forward or reverse the track
USB memory
To detach the USB memory,
straightly pull it out from the unit.
To go to the next or previous tracks 4
Confirm the selection.
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3/WMA/SD/USB)
For MP3 tracks:
For WMA tracks:
The selected list appears on the display.
• You can move to the other list by turning the control dial.
5
Select a disc/folder/file from the list.
Current folder
• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List
( ) and Folder List ( / /
), see the following.
Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step
3
Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
If you select the current disc/folder
(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File
List appears.
6
Starts playback.
Other main functions
Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list
• This function is not available for an audio CD or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
When using the remote controller
• To directly select a disc ( )
• To directly select a track of an audio CD or a CD Text ( )
• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder
( / / )
To select a number from 1 – 6:
3
Select a list type.
To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):
*
1
Selectable only when the source is
“CD-CH.”
*
2
Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.
For MP3/WMA folders:
It is required that folders are assigned with
2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.
13
14
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
1
2
After making sure “No Eject?” is selected...
• “No Eject” flashes, and the disc cannot be ejected.
To cancel the prohibition,
repeat the same procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is selected.
• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
3
Select one of the items (see the following table)
.
Intro Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...
Track
: All tracks of the current playback media. [ ]
Folder
* 1 : First track of all folders of the current playback media. [ ]
Disc
*
2
: First track of all the inserted discs.
Off
[
: Cancels.
]
Repeat Plays repeatedly
Track
: The current track. [ ]
Folder
* 1 : All tracks of the current folder.
[ ]
Disc
*
2
: All tracks of the inserted discs.
Off
[
: Cancels.
]
Random Plays at random
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folder and so on.
Disc
[ ]
: All tracks of the current disc.
All
Off
* 3
[ ]
: All tracks of the inserted discs/ media. [
: Cancels.
]
* 1
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/
USB).
*
2
Only when the source is CD-CH.
*
3
Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.
4
Finish the procedure.
Sound adjustments
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
You can create a more acoustic sound field such as in a theater, hall, etc.
• When crossover network (see page 18) is activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”
DSP modes
Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,
Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—
Karaoke.)
To make more precise settings,
see the following.
To cancel the acoustic effect,
select “Defeat” in step
Ÿ
.
Precise settings for the DSP modes
1
Select a DSP mode.
2
Select the number of the built-in speakers.
• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker number is fixed to “4ch.”
~
Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select one of the DSP modes.
3
Select your listening seat position.
•
To finish the procedure
•
To adjust the effect level
Go to step
!
.
For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect level is not adjustable.
!
Adjust the effect level.
4
Select the speaker to be adjusted.
*
Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step
2
.
•
To finish the procedure
Continued on the next page
15
16
5
Select the distance between the selected speaker and the seat.
3
Finish the procedure.
Once you have set the distance, it is memorized for each seat position selected in step
3
. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select the seat position.
To change the measuring unit
Using the equalizer—EQ
You can adjust the sound equalization patterns to your preference by using either Graphic EQ or Parametric EQ.
• Adjust the equalizer to match the reproducible frequency range of the connected speakers; otherwise, the adjustments may not be effective.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the
7 distance for the other speakers.
Finish the procedure.
Selecting preset sound modes—
Graphic EQ
Sound modes
Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B
(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,
Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Activating BBE Digital
BBE Digital is a digital processing method to restore the brilliance and clarity of the original live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach the ear than low frequency sounds.
BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship between the low, mid, and high frequencies by adding a progressively longer delay time to the low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.
1
Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).
2
Select the effect level.
3
Select a sound mode.
4
Finish the procedure.
Storing your own sound modes
1
Select a sound mode.
2
Select a frequency band.
3
Select a band.
Band1
: 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz
Band2
: 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz
Band3
: 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz
4
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected band.
3
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected frequency band.
5
Select the frequency.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other frequency bands.
5
6
Select one of the user modes.
• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each other. (Only selectable frequencies are shown on the display.)
6
Select the band width (Q).
7
Store the adjustments.
• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.
Then repeat steps
3
to
6
.
7
Finish the procedure.
Adjusting Parametric EQ
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Once you have made adjustments, it is memorized. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select Parametric EQ.
17
Activating crossover network
By activating crossover network, you can allocate different frequency range of sound signals to different speakers to match their characteristic.
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following:
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For 3-way network speaker system, see
Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).
You cannot perform other operations until you finish the following procedure.
While the power is turned off...
~
Ÿ
To cancel Crossover,
repeat the same procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?” appears on the display.
• indicator goes off.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.
~
Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select a setting item.
*
Appears only when crossover network is activated (see left column).
When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or
“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER to enter its submenu.
!
Adjust the selected setting item.
(See the following for details.)
• To adjust other SEL settings, press
BACK. Then repeat steps
Ÿ
and
!
.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
18
!
To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal
•
Fad (fader)
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
•
To cancel the procedure,
press and hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power turns off.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
• indicator lights up (in sequence with other indicators).
•
Bal (balance)
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
To adjust reproduced frequency level—X-Over
This setting is available only when crossover network (see page 18) is activated.
1
Select a filter.
To adjust subwoofer output—
S.woofer
1
Adjust the output level.
HPF
(Front/Rear)
: Frequencies lower than the selected level are cut-off.
LPF (Rear)
: Frequencies higher than the selected level are cut-off.
2
Select “On” to activate the selected filter.
• If you connect high-range speakers to
Front or Rear output, select “On” for the corresponding HPF to prevent the speakers from being damaged.
2
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected subwoofer.
3
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
3
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected speakers.
1.6kHz – 16.0kHz
: Front HPF and Rear LPF
31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz
: Rear HPF
4
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
To adjust the input level of each source—Vol Adj
This setting is required for each source except for FM.
Once an adjustment is made, it will be memorized. When you change the source the volume level will automatically increase or decrease according to the adjusted level.
1
Select a source before entering the SEL menu.
2
Adjust to match the input level to the FM sound level.
19
20
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.
1
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
2
Select a PSM item.
3
Select or adjust the selected PSM item.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.
5
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Demo
Display demonstration
Anime
Animation
Clock H
* 1
Hour adjustment
Clock M
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
Scroll
Dimmer
Items Settings, [reference page]
•
•
•
On
Off
On
[Initial]
[Initial]
: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].
: Cancels.
: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power, change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.
: Cancels.
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
Off
1
–
12
(
0
–
23
)
[Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]
•
•
•
•
00
–
59
[Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]
: See also page 8 for setting.
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
12Hours
[Initial]
•
24Hours
•
Once
[Initial]
•
Auto
•
Off
Auto
[Initial]
Time Set
Off
On
: Scrolls the track information once.
: Repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).
: Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.
: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.
: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 22 for setting.
From: Any hour; To: Any hour
: Cancels.
: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)
Indications Items Settings, [reference page]
Bright
Display brightness
ID3 Tag
Tag display
Theme
Display theme
Beep
Key-touch tone
Ext In
*
2
External input
•
•
1
–
10
[Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4“ takes no effect.)
•
Large
(
1
[Initial] or
2
)
•
Small
(
1
[Initial] or
2
)
IF Band
Intermediate frequency band
• Auto
[Initial]
•
Wide
•
•
On
Off
On
Off
[Initial]
[Initial]
: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
: Cancels.
: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 22 for setting.
: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 22 for setting.
: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
: Activates the key-touch tone.
: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
Tel
Telephone muting
•
Changer
[Initial]
•
Ext In
: To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,
[24].
: To use any other external component, [26].
•
Muting 1/
Muting 2
•
Off
[Initial]
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.
• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.
: Cancels.
Amp Gain
Amplifier gain control
•
High PWR
•
Low PWR
•
Off
: Volume 00 – Volume 50
: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)
: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
*
1
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
*
2
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.
21
22
Selecting timer for the dimmer
You can dim the display at night or as you set the timer.
1
Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu.
2
Select “Time Set.”
Selecting the graphic theme
You can select the graphic theme for large and small display sizes (see also page 5).
1
Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.
2
Select the size of the display.
3
Adjust the dimmer time.
1
Set the dimmer start time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
3
Select the theme.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the other display size and theme.
5
Finish the procedure.
2
Set the dimmer end time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
To show the selected display theme,
press
DISP repeatedly while playing a source.
4
Finish the procedure.
2
Select a character.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to station frequencies,
CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer) and the external components (LINE-IN and
EXT-IN).
3
Move to the next (or previous) character position.
Sources Maximum number of characters
Station frequencies
Up to 16 characters (up to 30 station frequencies including bothe FM and AM)
CDs/CD-CH * Up to 32 characters (up to 30 discs)
External component
Up to 16 characters
*
You cannot assign names to any discs other than conventional CDs.
1
Select the sources.
• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external component: Select
“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”
2
Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character set.
4
Repeat steps
1
and
3
until you finish entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
• To cancel the title entry without registration, press
MENU.
To erase the entire title
In step
3
...
A
(A – Z: upper case)
=
a
(a – z: lower case)
=
0
(numbers and symbols)
=
Á
(Accented letters: upper case)
=
á
(Accented letters: lower case)
=
(back to the beginning)
• For available characters, see page 31.
23
24
iPod®/D. player operations
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.
!
Adjust the volume.
Before operating your iPod or D. player:
Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.
•
Interface adapter for iPod
®
—KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.
•
D. player interface adapter
—KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.
To pause
*
1
or stop
*
2
playback
To resume playback, press it again.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
Caution:
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.
To go to the next or previous tracks
Preparations:
Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external input setting, see page 21.
~
* 1
For iPod
* 2
For D. player
Ÿ
Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused * 1 or stopped * 2 previously.
Selecting a track from the menu
1
Enter the main menu.
Selecting the playback modes
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
Now the
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
buttons work as the menu selecting buttons * .
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
–
If no operations are done for about
5 seconds.
–
When you confirm the selection of a track.
2
Select the desired menu.
3
Select an item (see table below).
4
Finish the procedure.
For iPod:
Playlists
Ô
Artists
Ô
Albums
Ô
Songs
Ô
Genres
Ô
Composers
Ô
(back to the beginning)
For D. player:
Playlist
Ô
Artist
Ô
Album
Ô
Genre
Ô
Track
Ô
(back to the beginning)
3
Confirm the selection.
To move back to the previous menu, press
5
.
• If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps
2
and
3
until the desired track is played.
• Holding
4
/
¢
can skip 10 items at a time.
Repeat play
One
All
Off
: Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Mode
=
One” for the D. player.
: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode
=
All” for the D. player.
: Cancels.
Random play
Album
* : Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
Song
/
On
: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Off
Songs” of the iPod or “Random
Play
=
On” of the D. player.
: Cancels.
*
For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums” of the main “MENU.”
25
26
Other external component operations
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input
Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input
Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see pages 11 – 14; For iPod, or D.player, see pages
24 and 25.
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
~
Connector
LINE-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
LINE IN plugs.
EXT-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
CD changer jack.
If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 21 and select the external input (“Ext In”).
Ÿ
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
!
Adjust the volume.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its case,
press down the center holder of the case and lift the disc out, holding it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the
Center holder edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case,
gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
To keep discs clean
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
How to handle SD card
SD cards are precision products. DO NOT impact, bend, drop, or wet them.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Stick-on label
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
Continued on the next page
27
28
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.
• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been assigned to the audio CD (see page 23), it will be shown on the display.
• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/
WMA track, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down, the control panel moves down, and the disc automatically ejects from the loading slot.
• If you keep the control panel open for about
1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep” setting is turned “On”—see page 21) the control panel returns to its previous position.
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with “Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.
Playing an MP3/WMA discs
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,
1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.
• The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo * : up to 128 (72) characters
– Joliet * : up to 64 (36) characters
– Windows long file name * : up to 128 (72) characters
*
The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is
313 or more.
• This unit can play back the files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a
USB memory
• While playing from an SD card or a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some
SD cards or USB memories due to their characteristics or recording conditions.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing some buttons on the control panel.
• If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, “No Files” appears and the unit returns to the previous source.
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
• For SD card: The maximum number of characters for folder name is 8 characters; file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot recognize folder with period (.) on the folder name.
For USB memory: The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.
• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of
255 files and 63 folders.
For USB memory: This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)
Continued on the next page
29
30
Sound adjustments
Selecting the DSP modes—DSP
• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the recording condition of the sources:
– Monaural sources such as AM and monaural FM broadcasting programs.
– Multiplex sound sources.
– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a chorus, or only a few instruments.
• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are used only to reproduce reflections and reverberations in order to creates a beingthere feeling in your car compartment.
• If fader or balance has been set close to its extreme, appropriate effect may not be obtained.
• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker number when “Defeat” is selected with crossover network activated.
Storing your own sound modes
• If you do not want to store your current adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment to the current playback source, press MENU to go back to the operation screen of the current source. Adjustment you made remains effective until you select a sound mode.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to the center.
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.
• You cannot change the input level—
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to adjust it.
General settings — PSM
• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than
“Auto.”
• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc in the unit and vise versa.
iPod® or D. player operations
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
D. player is charged through this unit.
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all operations from the iPod or D. player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or
D. player and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than
16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 20). This unit can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:
For iPod users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>
For D. player users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>
Available characters
In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.
Accented letters: upper case
Numbers and symbols
Accented letters: lower case
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User 1
User 2
User 3
Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode
Sound mode
Preset equalizing value
63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz
00 00 00 00
+06 +06 +04 +02
00
00
00
00
00 00 00
+02 +04 +02
+06 +04 +04 +04
00 +04 +02 00
00
00
+02 +02 +02 +06
+02 +02 +02 +04
+06 +04 +02 +02 +02 +02 +02 +06 +04
+08 +04 +02 00 –04 –02 00 +02 +02
+04 +02 00 00 00 00 00 +02 +04
+06 +02 00 00
+04 +06 +04 +02
00 00 00 00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
+02 +04 +04 +04 +06
00 00 +02 +04 00
00 00 00 00 00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
31
32
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “Connect Error” appears on the display.
• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the control panel movement is freezed.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach it again (see pages 4 and 26).
Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the installation.
Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
Connect the antenna firmly.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped.
Insert the disc correctly.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for recording.
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.
• Unlock the disc (see page 14).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading
Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).
Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
Symptoms
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Noise is generated.
Remedies/Causes
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders. • A longer readout time is required (“File
Check” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have intended them to play.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “No Music” appears on the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
• Noise is generated.
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then returns to the previous source.
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.
Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 31).
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• Readout time varies depending on the device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an appropriate format.
The track is unplayable.
• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted correctly.
The files included in the device are corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the display.
Continued on the next page
33
34
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display while playing tracks from an SD card.
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the device.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try again.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 31).
Insert a disc into the magazine.
• “No Disc” appears on the display.
• “No Magazine” appears on the display.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
Insert the magazine.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press the reset button of the CD changer.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Deactivate crossover network (see page 18).
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes than “Defeat.”
• Only high range sound or low range sound is reproduced though full range speakers are connected.
• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does not work.
• Buttons do not work as intended.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press
POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.
• The sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display.
• Playback stops.
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/
D. player.
Check the connecting cable and its connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart the playback operation using the control panel (see page
24).
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• No sound can be heard when connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard.
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when connecting a D. player.
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/
D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work after disconnecting from this unit.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod or D. player.
•
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
SD logo is a trademark.
•
Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.
Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.
•
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
35
36
Specifications
Maximum Power
Output:
Continuous Power
Output (RMS):
Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control
Range:
Front/Rear:
Frequency Response:
Signal to Noise Ratio:
Level/Impedance: Line-In:
Line-Out:
Output Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
Other Terminals:
50 W per channel
Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Frequencies:
Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz
(9 bands)
Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,
100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,
1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)
Level: ±10 dB
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
LINE IN, CD changer
Frequency Range: FM:
AM:
FM Tuner Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
AM Tuner
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
30 dB
20 μV/65 dB
Type:
Signal Detection
System:
Number of Channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
Compact disc player
Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
98 dB
102 dB
Less than measurable limit
MP3:
WMA:
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
MP3:
WMA:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 320 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
FAT 12/16
8 MB – 512 MB
MP3/WMA
8 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 192 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
Max. Current:
MP3:
WMA:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
FAT 12/16/32
Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
MP3/WMA
Less than 500 mA
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
5 kbps – 320 kbps
8 kHz – 48 kHz
Power Requirement:
Grounding System:
Operating Voltage:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):
Panel Size (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
0°C to +40°C
182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
1.7 k g (excluding accessories)
37
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Ada MASALAH dengan cara pengoperasian?
Setel kembali unit Anda
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda
EN, IN
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0206DTSMDTJEIN
KD-SH1000
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan
GET0365-009A
[UN]
0206DTSMDTJEIN
EN, IN
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH INDONESIA
This unit is designed to operate on
12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems
. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada
12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE.
Jika kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
PERINGATAN
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of
4
Ω
to 8
Ω ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Catatan:
• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi
4
Ω
sampai 8
Ω
). Jika maksimum power kurang dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “Amp Gain” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 21 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika memindahkan alat penerima ini.
Heat sink
Pendingin
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan sambungan-sambungan speaker:
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya, alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan speaker dalam mobil anda.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Jika ada item yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer audio mobil JVC anda.
A
/
B
Hard case/Control panel
Kotak keras/Panel kontrol
C
Sleeve
Selongsong
D
Trim plate
Plat rapi
E
Power cord
Kabel power
I
Rubber cushion
Bantalan karet
F
Washer (ø5)
Perapat sambungan (ø5)
J
Handles
Pegangan-pegangan
1
G
Lock nut (M5)
Mur kunci (M5)
K
Remote controller
Pengontrol jauh
H
Mounting bolt (M5
×
20 mm)
Baut bingkai (M5
×
20 mm)
L
Battery
Baterai
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang berkualitas.
Do the required electrical connections.
Lakukan penyambunganpenyambungan listrik yang diperlukan.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat pada tempatnya.
* 1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
* 1
Ketika anda memberdirikan alat penerima, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
* 2 Fit the protrusions outside the unit.
* 2
Pasangkan tonjolan keluar di sebelah luar radio.
Memindahkan alat penerima
Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik alat penerima seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga alat penerima dapat dipindahkan.
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan penguat tambahan
Fire wall
Dinding tahan api
Stay (option)
Penguat (tambahan)
Dashboard
Tempat alat pada bagian depan
Screw (option)
Sekrup (tambahan)
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima tanpa menggunakan selongsong
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm)
*
3
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5
×
8 mm)
* 3
* 3 Not supplied for this unit.
* 3
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.
Bracket * 3
Breket
* 3
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm)
*
3
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5
×
8 mm)
*
3
Kantong
Bracket
*
3
Breket
*
3
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang dari
30˚.
Note
Catatan
:
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
:
Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-skerup panjang–
8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.
Caution when installing / Pasangkan tonjolan keluar di sebelah luar radio
Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.
• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).
Pasangkan radio ke dalam selongsong dengan menggunakan empat sudut dari plat.
• JANGAN menekan panel (yang berbayang di dalam ilustrasi).
2
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan
Before connecting:
Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Sebelum penyambungan:
Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.
1
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2
Connect the antenna cord.
3
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
1
Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.
2
Sambungkan kabel antena.
3
Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.
If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car,
see diagram for speaker connection.
Jika Anda telah memasang sistem speaker 3-arah di dalam mobil Anda,
lihat diagram untuk penyambungan speaker.
To subwoofer (see diagram )
Ke subwoofer (lihat diagram )
Antenna connector
Konektor antena
LINE IN
(see diagram / lihat diagram )
Rear ground terminal
Terminal tanah belakang
Line out (see diagram )
Keluaran (lihat diagram )
To external components (see diagram )
Ke komponen luar (lihat diagram )
* 4
Not supplied for this unit.
* 4
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima.
* 5
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.
* 5
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A
Black
Hitam
Yellow
*
5
Kuning
* 5
Red
Merah
Ignition switch
Saklar kontak
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai mobil
(abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring
Fuse block
Blok sekring
Blue
Biru
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
Biru dengan strip putih
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)
Orange with white stripe
Oranye dengan strip putih
To car light control switch
Ke saklar kontrol lampu mobil
Brown
Coklat
To cellular phone system
Ke sistem telepon selular
White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip hitam
White
Putih
Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam
Left speaker (front)
Speaker kiri (depan)
Gray
Abu-abu
Green with black stripe
Hijau dengan strip hitam
Right speaker (front)
Speaker kanan (depan)
Green
Hijau
Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip hitam
Left speaker (rear)
Speaker kiri (belakang)
Purple
Ungu
Right speaker (rear)
Speaker kanan (belakang)
3
ENGLISH
INDONESIA
B
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer
/
Penyambungan penguat eksternal dan/atau subwoofer
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.
• For amplifier only:
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit.
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
•
Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.
•
Hanya untuk penguat saja:
– Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.
Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.
–
Anda dapat mematikan penguat yang terpasang tetap di dalam dan mengirim sinyal audio hanya ke penguat eksternal untuk mendapatkan suara yang jelas dan mencegah bertambahnya panas di dalam radio (lihat halaman 21 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
–
Level jalur output dari alat penerima ini tetap tinggi untuk memelihara suara hi-fi yang telah di hasilkan dari alat penerima ini.
Ketika menyambung sebuah penguat eksternal ke alat penerima ini, kecilkan kontrol gain pada penguat eksternal untuk mendapatkan hasil terbaik dari alat penerima ini.
Remote lead
Ujung jauh
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (Biru dengan strip putih)
To the remote lead of other equipment or auto antenna if any
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Rear speakers
Speaker-speaker belakang
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
Front speakers
Speaker-speaker depan
Front speakers
Speaker-speaker depan
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
* 1
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 1
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat (jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel).
Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.
* 2
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 2
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
4
PEMECAHAN MASALAH
• Sekring meledak.
*
Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
*
Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
*
Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?
• Suara terdistorsi.
*
Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
*
Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
*
Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan tertebal?
• Alat penerima menjadi panas.
*
Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
*
Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?
C
Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / Penyambungan speaker untuk sistem speaker 3-arah
You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3-way network speaker system
(high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).
Anda dapat menikmati sebuah dunia dari “audio murni” dalam mobil Anda dengan menyambungkan sistem speaker 3-arah (cakupan-tinggi/cakupan-sedang/subwoofer).
IMPORTANT:
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following.
• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For details about the setting, see pages 18 and 19 of the INSTRUCTIONS.
PENTING:
Jika Anda telah memasang sistem speaker 3-arah dalam mobil Anda, pastikan hal-hal berikut:
• Sambungkan sistem speaker, seperti diilustrasikan di bawah.
• Sebelum menggunakan sistem, aktifkan jaringan seberangan (crossover network) dan atur awal frekuensi-frekuensi pancung yang tepat untuk HPF/LPF (khususnya untuk HPF); sebaliknya, hal tersebut dapat merusak speaker-speaker.
• Untuk lebih jelas mengenai pengaturan, lihat halaman 18 dan 19 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output
Ketika menyambungkan speaker-speaker (cakupan-tinggi/cakupan-sedang) melalui keluaran speaker
White
Putih
Gray
Abu-abu
Left high-range speaker
Speaker kiri cakupan-tinggi
White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip hitam
Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam
Left mid-range speaker
Speaker kiri cakupan-sedang
Green
Hijau
Green with black stripe
Hijau dengan strip hitam
Purple
Ungu
Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip hitam
Right high-range speaker
Speaker kanan cakupan-tinggi
Right mid-range speaker
Speaker kanan cakupan-sedang
Connecting subwoofer / Menyambungkan subwoofer
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (Biru dengan strip putih)
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
Remote lead
Ujung jauh
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
To subwoofer out
Ke keluaran subwoofer
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to obtain more powerful sound
Ketika menyambungkan speaker-speaker (cakupan-tinggi/cakupan-tengah) melalui penguatpenguat eksternal—untuk memperoleh suara yang sangat kuat
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
To LINE OUT (REAR)
Ke LINE OUT (REAR)
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
To LINE OUT (FRONT)
Ke LINE OUT (FRONT)
Left high-range speaker
Speaker kiri cakupan-tinggi
Right high-range speaker
Speaker kanan cakupan-tinggi
Left mid-range speaker
Speaker kiri cakupan-sedang
Right mid-range speaker
Speaker kanan cakupan-sedang
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
* 3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 3
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat (jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel).
Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.
* 4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 4
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
5
D
Connecting the external components / Menyambung komponen eksternal
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD changer, Apple iPod
®
atau JVC D. player
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah “Changer” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 21 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)
You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod * 5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).
Anda bisa menyambungkan komponen-komponen ini seperti yang diilustrasikan di bawah. iPod
* 5
atau D. player bisa disambungkan dengan mengunakan adaptor antarmuka (tidak disediakan)—
KS-PD100 (untuk iPod) atau KS-PD500 (untuk D. player).
CAUTION / PERINGATAN:
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
• Sebelum menyambungkan komponen eksternal, pastikan bahwa alat penerima sudah dimatikan.
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (dibeli terpisah)
or
atau
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC D. player (dibeli terpisah)
JVC CD changer
CD changer JVC
CD changer jack
Konektor CD changer
* 5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
* 5
iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Computer, Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di negara-negara lain.
* 6
Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer
* 6
Penyambung sinyal disediakan untuk CD changer anda
Other external component / Komponen eksternal lainnya
• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah “Ext In” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 21 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)
External component
Komponen eksternal
CD changer jack
Konektor CD changer
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
Steker mini stereo 3.5 mm
External component
Komponen eksternal
External component
Komponen eksternal
* 7
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
* 7
Adapter Input Saluran KS-U57 (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
* 8
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
* 8
Adapter Input AUX KS-U58 (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
* 9
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 9
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
6
CD RECEIVER KD-SH1000
KD-SH1000
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0365-005A
[UT]
2
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION:
Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3.
CAUTION:
Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
Notice:
The display window built in this unit has been produced with high precision, but it may have some ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not malfunction.
How to reset your unit
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card first (see page 11).
1
2
•
If this does not work, reset your unit.
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in
“More about this unit” (see pages 27 – 31).
Press briefly.
Press repeatedly.
Press either one.
Press
A
, then
B
.
Press and hold until your desired response begins.
Press and hold both buttons at the same time.
The following marks are used to indicate...
: Built-in CD player operations.
: External CD changer operations.
: SD player operations.
: External USB memory operations.
CONTENTS
Control panel ................................... 5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
............ 6
Getting started ................................. 7
Basic operations ............................................... 7
Radio operations .............................. 8
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations .................................... 11
Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 11
Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 11
Playing from an SD card .................................... 11
Playing from a USB memory ............................. 12
Sound adjustments ........................... 15
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 15
Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 16
Activating crossover network ........................... 18
Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 18
General settings — PSM ................... 20
Title assignment .............................. 23 iPod®/D. player operations ................ 24
Other external component operations ... 26
Maintenance .................................... 26
More about this unit ......................... 27
Troubleshooting ............................... 32
Specifications ................................... 36
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.
3
4
How to detach/attach the control panel
Detaching...
How to enter the various menus
The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,
PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).
• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds, menu screen is canceled.
1
2
Select a menu you want.
Attaching...
Time countdown indicator
3
Enter the selected menu.
How to change the control panel angle
• To go back to the previous screen or exit the MENU screen, press BACK repeatedly.
4
Operate as instructed on the screen.
• To go back to the MENU screen, press
MENU.
When using the remote controller
Caution:
How to change the display information and patterns
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
Source operation display Clock time display
Large graphic display (full display size) Small graphic display
Control panel
Parts identification
1
BAND button
2
SOURCE button
3
• Control dial
• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER button
4
MENU button
5
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
6
Display window
7
DISP (display) button
8
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
9
(angle) button p
0
(eject) button q
4
/
¢
buttons w
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
e
BACK button r
Reset button t
(control panel release) button
5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
Caution:
6
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.
Main elements and features
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
2
SOURCE button
Selects the source.
3
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Changes the preset stations.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the folders.
•
While listening to an Apple iPod
®
or a
JVC D. player:
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
∞
.
– Enters the main menu with
5
.
(Now
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
work as the menu selecting buttons.) *
4
VOL (volume) + / – buttons
Adjusts the volume level.
5
Number buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Selects the preset station if pressed, or store a station if pressed and held.
• F
or CD/CD Text:
Selects the tracks.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Selects the folders.
•
For CD changer:
Selects the discs.
6
ANGLE button
Adjusts the control panel angle.
7
BAND button
Selects the band.
8
4
/
¢
buttons
•
For FM/AM:
Searches for stations if pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed and held.
•
For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the tracks if pressed, or fastforwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.
•
While listening to an iPod or a D. player
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
∞
to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
*
5
:
Returns to the previous menu.
∞
:
Confirms the selection.
Getting started
Activates or deactivates crossover network
(see page 18) before turning on the power.
Basic operations
~
Turn on the power.
Ÿ
FM/AM
=
CD
*
=
SD
*
=
USB
*
=
CD-CH
* /
iPod
* /
D. player
* (or
EXT-IN
)
=
LINE-IN
=
(back to the beginning)
*
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.
!
For FM/AM tuner
⁄
Adjust the volume.
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
Continued on the next page
7
8
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press it again.
To turn off the power
Radio operations
~
Ÿ
!
Start searching for a station.
Selected band appears.
Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
20 – 22.
1
2
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching,
press the same button again.
To tune in to a station manually
In step
!
above...
1
1
Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “Demo,” then “Off.”
2
Setting the clock
Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust the minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or
“12Hours.”
3
Finish the procedure.
2
Select a desired station frequency.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
To check the current clock time while the power is turned off
3
4
MO indicator lights up.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.
To restore the stereo effect,
repeat the same procedure and select “Off” in step
3
. The MO indicator goes off.
Tuning in to FM stations with strong signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-
Extreme)
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Memory)
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to store into.
2
3
FM station automatic presetting —
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
4
4
DX indicator goes off and LO indicator lights up.
Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be detected.
To tune in to all receivable stations,
repeat the same procedure and select “DX” in step
3
. The
LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights up.
2
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
1
3
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
• If you hold down
5
/
∞
, the Preset Station
List appears (go to step
6
).
Continued on the next page
9
10
4
1
2
Listening to a preset station
5
6
Select a preset number.
• You can move to the lists of the other FM bands by turning the control dial.
7
Store the station.
When using the remote controller
Directly select the preset number.
When using the remote controller
After tuning in to a station you want to preset...
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Playing from an SD card
Before detaching the control panel, turn off the power.
~
Ÿ
SD loading slot
To stop play and eject the disc
Note:
If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB” flashes on the display. If this happens, detach the USB memory, then, press
0
button again.
Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
*
If you have changed the external input setting to “Ext In” (see page 21), you cannot select the
CD changer.
SD card
Press in the SD card until you hear a clicking sound.
To eject the SD card,
press the SD card again.
• Press the SD card softly (do not release your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD card may pop out from the unit.
Continued on the next page
11
12
!
Attach the control panel.
Cautions:
• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory when it might hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all important data have been backed up to avoid losing the data.
⁄
• The control panel goes back to the previous position.
If an SD card or USB memory has been attached...
Playback starts automatically if tracks are recorded.
Playing from a USB memory
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a
USB memory.
All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.
~
Ÿ
USB input terminal
Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
• If a different SD card or USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.
About MP3 and WMA tracks
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
To fast-forward or reverse the track
USB memory
To detach the USB memory,
straightly pull it out from the unit.
To go to the next or previous tracks
4
Confirm the selection.
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3/WMA/SD/USB)
For MP3 tracks:
For WMA tracks:
The selected list appears on the display.
• You can move to the other list by turning the control dial.
5
Select a disc/folder/file from the list.
Current folder
• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List
( ) and Folder List ( / /
), see the following.
Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step
3
Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
If you select the current disc/folder
(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File
List appears.
6
Starts playback.
Other main functions
Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list
• This function is not available for an audio CD or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
When using the remote controller
• To directly select a disc ( )
• To directly select a track of an audio CD or a CD Text ( )
• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder
( / / )
To select a number from 1 – 6:
3
Select a list type.
To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):
*
1
Selectable only when the source is
“CD-CH.”
*
2
Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.
For MP3/WMA folders:
It is required that folders are assigned with
2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.
13
14
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
1
2
After making sure “No Eject?” is selected...
• “No Eject” flashes, and the disc cannot be ejected.
To cancel the prohibition,
repeat the same procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is selected.
• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
3
Select one of the items (see the following table)
.
Intro Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...
Track
: All tracks of the current playback media. [ ]
Folder
*
1
: First track of all folders of the current playback media. [ ]
Disc
* 2 : First track of all the inserted discs.
Off
[
: Cancels.
]
Repeat Plays repeatedly
Track
: The current track. [ ]
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder.
[ ]
Disc
* 2 : All tracks of the inserted discs.
[ ]
Off
: Cancels.
Random Plays at random
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folder and so on.
Disc
All
Off
*
3
[ ]
: All tracks of the current disc.
[ ]
: All tracks of the inserted discs/ media. [
: Cancels.
]
*
1
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/
USB).
* 2
Only when the source is CD-CH.
*
3
Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.
4
Finish the procedure.
Sound adjustments
To make more precise settings,
see the following.
To cancel the acoustic effect,
select “Defeat” in step
Ÿ
.
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
You can create a more acoustic sound field such as in a theater, hall, etc.
• When crossover network (see page 18) is activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”
DSP modes
Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,
Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—
Karaoke.)
Precise settings for the DSP modes
1
Select a DSP mode.
2
Select the number of the built-in speakers.
• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker number is fixed to “4ch.”
~
Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select one of the DSP modes.
3
Select your listening seat position.
•
To finish the procedure
•
To adjust the effect level
Go to step
!
.
For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect level is not adjustable.
!
Adjust the effect level.
4
Select the speaker to be adjusted.
*
Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step
2
.
•
To finish the procedure
Continued on the next page
15
16
5
Select the distance between the selected speaker and the seat.
3
Finish the procedure.
Once you have set the distance, it is memorized for each seat position selected in step
3
. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select the seat position.
To change the measuring unit
Using the equalizer—EQ
You can adjust the sound equalization patterns to your preference by using either Graphic EQ or Parametric EQ.
• Adjust the equalizer to match the reproducible frequency range of the connected speakers; otherwise, the adjustments may not be effective.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the distance for the other speakers.
7
Finish the procedure.
Selecting preset sound modes—
Graphic EQ
Sound modes
Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B
(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,
Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Activating BBE Digital
BBE Digital is a digital processing method to restore the brilliance and clarity of the original live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach the ear than low frequency sounds.
BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship between the low, mid, and high frequencies by adding a progressively longer delay time to the low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.
1
Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).
2
Select the effect level.
3
Select a sound mode.
4
Finish the procedure.
Storing your own sound modes
1
Select a sound mode.
2
Select a frequency band.
3
Select a band.
Band1
: 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz
Band2
: 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz
Band3
: 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz
4
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected band.
3
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected frequency band.
5
Select the frequency.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other frequency bands.
5
6
Select one of the user modes.
• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each other. (Only selectable frequencies are shown on the display.)
6
Select the band width (Q).
7
Store the adjustments.
• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.
Then repeat steps
3
to
6
.
7
Finish the procedure.
Adjusting Parametric EQ
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Once you have made adjustments, it is memorized. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select Parametric EQ.
17
Activating crossover network
By activating crossover network, you can allocate different frequency range of sound signals to different speakers to match their characteristic.
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following:
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For 3-way network speaker system, see
Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).
You cannot perform other operations until you finish the following procedure.
While the power is turned off...
~
Ÿ
To cancel Crossover,
repeat the same procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?” appears on the display.
• indicator goes off.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.
~
Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select a setting item.
*
Appears only when crossover network is activated (see left column).
When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or
“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER to enter its submenu.
!
Adjust the selected setting item.
(See the following for details.)
• To adjust other SEL settings, press
BACK. Then repeat steps
Ÿ
and
!
.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
18
!
To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal
•
Fad (fader)
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
•
To cancel the procedure,
press and hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power turns off.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
• indicator lights up (in sequence with other indicators).
•
Bal (balance)
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
To adjust reproduced frequency level—X-Over
This setting is available only when crossover network (see page 18) is activated.
1
Select a filter.
To adjust subwoofer output—
S.woofer
1
Adjust the output level.
HPF
(Front/Rear)
: Frequencies lower than the selected level are cut-off.
LPF (Rear)
: Frequencies higher than the selected level are cut-off.
2
Select “On” to activate the selected filter.
• If you connect high-range speakers to
Front or Rear output, select “On” for the corresponding HPF to prevent the speakers from being damaged.
2
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected subwoofer.
3
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
3
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected speakers.
1.6kHz – 16.0kHz
: Front HPF and Rear LPF
31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz
: Rear HPF
4
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
To adjust the input level of each source—Vol Adj
This setting is required for each source except for FM.
Once an adjustment is made, it will be memorized. When you change the source the volume level will automatically increase or decrease according to the adjusted level.
1
Select a source before entering the SEL menu.
2
Adjust to match the input level to the FM sound level.
19
20
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.
1
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
2
Select a PSM item.
3
Select or adjust the selected PSM item.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.
5
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Demo
Display demonstration
Anime
Animation
Clock H
*
1
Hour adjustment
Clock M
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
Scroll
Dimmer
Items Settings, [reference page]
•
•
•
On
Off
On
[Initial]
[Initial]
: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].
: Cancels.
: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power, change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.
: Cancels.
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
Off
1
–
12
(
0
–
23
)
[Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]
•
•
•
•
00
–
59
[Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
12Hours
[Initial]
•
24Hours
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
Once
[Initial]
•
Auto
•
Off
Auto
Off
On
[Initial]
Time Set
: Scrolls the track information once.
: Repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).
: Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.
: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.
: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 22 for setting.
From: Any hour; To: Any hour
: Cancels.
: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)
Indications Items Settings, [reference page]
Bright
Display brightness
ID3 Tag
Tag display
Theme
Display theme
•
•
1
–
10
[Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4“ takes no effect.)
On
Off
[Initial]
•
Large
(
1
[Initial] or
2
)
• Small
(
1
[Initial] or
2
)
IF Band
Intermediate frequency band
•
Auto
[Initial]
• Wide
: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
: Cancels.
: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 22 for setting.
: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 22 for setting.
: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
Beep
Key-touch tone
Ext In
* 2
External input
Tel
Telephone muting
Amp Gain
Amplifier gain control
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
: Activates the key-touch tone.
: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
•
Changer
[Initial]
•
Ext In
: To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,
[24].
: To use any other external component, [26].
•
Muting 1/
Muting 2
•
•
•
•
Off
High PWR
Low PWR
Off
[Initial]
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.
• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.
: Cancels.
: Volume 00 – Volume 50
: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)
: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
*
1
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
* 2
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.
21
22
Selecting timer for the dimmer
You can dim the display at night or as you set the timer.
1
Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu.
2
Select “Time Set.”
Selecting the graphic theme
You can select the graphic theme for large and small display sizes (see also page 5).
1
Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.
2
Select the size of the display.
3
Adjust the dimmer time.
1
Set the dimmer start time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
3
Select the theme.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the other display size and theme.
5
Finish the procedure.
2
Set the dimmer end time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
To show the selected display theme,
press
DISP repeatedly while playing a source.
4
Finish the procedure.
2
Select a character.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to station frequencies,
CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer) and the external components (LINE-IN and
EXT-IN).
3
Move to the next (or previous) character position.
Sources Maximum number of characters
Station frequencies
Up to 16 characters (up to 30 station frequencies including bothe FM and AM)
CDs/CD-CH * Up to 32 characters (up to 30 discs)
External component
Up to 16 characters
*
You cannot assign names to any discs other than conventional CDs.
1
Select the sources.
• For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external component: Select
“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”
2
Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character set.
4
Repeat steps
1
and
3
until you finish entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
• To cancel the title entry without registration, press
MENU.
To erase the entire title
In step
3
...
A
(A – Z: upper case)
=
a
(a – z: lower case)
=
0
(numbers and symbols)
=
Á
(Accented letters: upper case)
=
á
(Accented letters: lower case)
=
(back to the beginning)
• For available characters, see page 31.
23
24
iPod®/D. player operations
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.
!
Adjust the volume.
Before operating your iPod or D. player:
Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.
•
Interface adapter for iPod
®
—KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.
•
D. player interface adapter
—KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.
To pause
*
1
or stop
*
2
playback
To resume playback, press it again.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
Caution:
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.
To go to the next or previous tracks
Preparations:
Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external input setting, see page 21.
~
*
1
For iPod
*
2
For D. player
Ÿ
Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused *
1
or stopped *
2 previously.
Selecting a track from the menu
1
Enter the main menu.
Selecting the playback modes
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
Now the
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
buttons work as the menu selecting buttons * .
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
–
If no operations are done for about
5 seconds.
–
When you confirm the selection of a track.
2
Select the desired menu.
3
Select an item (see table below).
4
Finish the procedure.
For iPod:
Playlists
Ô
Artists
Ô
Albums
Ô
Songs
Ô
Genres
Ô
Composers
Ô
(back to the beginning)
For D. player:
Playlist
Ô
Artist
Ô
Album
Ô
Genre
Ô
Track
Ô
(back to the beginning)
3
Confirm the selection.
To move back to the previous menu, press
5
.
• If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps
2
and
3
until the desired track is played.
• Holding
4
/
¢
can skip 10 items at a time.
Repeat play
One
All
Off
: Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Mode
=
One” for the D. player.
: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode
=
All” for the D. player.
: Cancels.
Random play
Album
* : Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
Song
/
On
: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Off
Songs” of the iPod or “Random
Play
=
On” of the D. player.
: Cancels.
*
For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums” of the main “MENU.”
25
26
Other external component operations
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input
Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input
Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see pages 11 – 14; For iPod, or D.player, see pages
24 and 25.
~
Connector
LINE-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
LINE IN plugs.
EXT-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
CD changer jack.
If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 21 and select the external input (“Ext In”).
Ÿ
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
!
Adjust the volume.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 15 – 19.)
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its case,
press down the center holder of the case and lift the disc out, holding it by the edges.
Center holder
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case,
gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
To keep discs clean
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
How to handle SD card
SD cards are precision products. DO NOT impact, bend, drop, or wet them.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Stick-on label
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
Continued on the next page
27
28
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.
• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been assigned to the audio CD (see page 23), it will be shown on the display.
• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/
WMA track, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down, the control panel moves down, and the disc automatically ejects from the loading slot.
• If you keep the control panel open for about
1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep” setting is turned “On”—see page 21) the control panel returns to its previous position.
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with “Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.
Playing an MP3/WMA discs
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,
1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.
• The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo * : up to 128 (72) characters
– Joliet * : up to 64 (36) characters
– Windows long file name * : up to 128 (72) characters
*
The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is
313 or more.
• This unit can play back the files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a
USB memory
• While playing from an SD card or a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some
SD cards or USB memories due to their characteristics or recording conditions.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing some buttons on the control panel.
• If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, “No Files” appears and the unit returns to the previous source.
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
• For SD card: The maximum number of characters for folder name is 8 characters; file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot recognize folder with period (.) on the folder name.
For USB memory: The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.
• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of
255 files and 63 folders.
For USB memory: This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)
Continued on the next page
29
30
Sound adjustments
Selecting the DSP modes—DSP
• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the recording condition of the sources:
– Monaural sources such as AM and monaural FM broadcasting programs.
– Multiplex sound sources.
– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a chorus, or only a few instruments.
• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are used only to reproduce reflections and reverberations in order to creates a beingthere feeling in your car compartment.
• If fader or balance has been set close to its extreme, appropriate effect may not be obtained.
• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker number when “Defeat” is selected with crossover network activated.
Storing your own sound modes
• If you do not want to store your current adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment to the current playback source, press MENU to go back to the operation screen of the current source. Adjustment you made remains effective until you select a sound mode.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to the center.
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.
• You cannot change the input level—
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to adjust it.
General settings — PSM
• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than
“Auto.”
• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc in the unit and vise versa.
iPod® or D. player operations
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
D. player is charged through this unit.
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all operations from the iPod or D. player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or
D. player and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than
16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 20). This unit can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:
For iPod users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>
For D. player users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>
Available characters
In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.
Accented letters: upper case Numbers and symbols
Accented letters: lower case
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User 1
User 2
User 3
Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode
Sound mode
Preset equalizing value
63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
+06 +06 +04 +02 00 00 +02 +04 +02
+06 +04 +04 +04
00 +04 +02 00
00
00
+02
+02
+02
+02
+02
+02
+06
+04
+06 +04 +02 +02 +02 +02 +02 +06 +04
+08 +04 +02
+04 +02 00
+06 +02 00
+04 +06 +04 +02
00 00 00 00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
–04 –02
00 00
+02 +04 +04 +04 +06
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
+02
+02
+02 +04
00
00
00
00
00
00
+02
+04
00
00
00
00
31
32
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “Connect Error” appears on the display.
• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the control panel movement is freezed.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach it again (see pages 4 and 26).
Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the installation.
Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
Connect the antenna firmly.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped.
Insert the disc correctly.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for recording.
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.
• Unlock the disc (see page 14).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading
Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).
Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
Symptoms
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Noise is generated.
• A longer readout time is required (“File
Check” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have intended them to play.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “No Music” appears on the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
• Noise is generated.
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then returns to the previous source.
Remedies/Causes
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.
Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 31).
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• Readout time varies depending on the device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an appropriate format.
The track is unplayable.
• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted correctly.
The files included in the device are corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the display.
Continued on the next page
33
34
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display while playing tracks from an SD card.
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
• “No Disc” appears on the display.
• “No Magazine” appears on the display.
Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the device.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try again.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 31).
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press the reset button of the CD changer.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes than “Defeat.”
• Only high range sound or low range sound is reproduced though full range speakers are connected.
• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does not work.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Deactivate crossover network (see page 18).
• Buttons do not work as intended.
• The sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display.
• Playback stops.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press
POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/
D. player.
Check the connecting cable and its connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart the playback operation using the control panel (see page
24).
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• No sound can be heard when connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard.
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when connecting a D. player.
• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the display.
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it again.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/
D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work after disconnecting from this unit.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod or D. player.
•
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
SD logo is a trademark.
•
Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.
Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.
•
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
35
36
Specifications
Maximum Power
Output:
Continuous Power
Output (RMS):
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control
Range:
Other Terminals:
Frequencies:
Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz
(9 bands)
Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,
100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,
1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)
Level: ±10 dB
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Frequency Response:
Signal to Noise Ratio:
Level/Impedance: Line-In:
Line-Out:
Output Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
70 dB
1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
LINE IN, CD changer
Frequency Range: FM:
AM:
FM Tuner Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
AM Tuner
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
30 dB
20 μV/65 dB
Type:
Signal Detection
System:
Number of Channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
Compact disc player
Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
98 dB
102 dB
Less than measurable limit
MP3:
WMA:
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
MP3:
WMA:
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
Max. Current:
MP3:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 320 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
FAT 12/16
8 MB – 512 MB
MP3/WMA
8 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 192 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
FAT 12/16/32
Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
MP3/WMA
Less than 500 mA
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
5 kbps – 320 kbps
8 kHz – 48 kHz
WMA: Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Power Requirement:
Grounding System:
Operating Voltage:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):
Panel Size (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
0°C to +40°C
182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
1.7 k g (excluding accessories)
37
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN, CT
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0206DTSMDTJEIN
KD-SH1000
Installation/Connection Manual
ϰ༬ો˿̱
GET0365-010A
[UT]
0206DTSMDTJEIN
EN, CT
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH ˁ̂
This unit is designed to operate on
12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems
. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
ʹጅ෮̈́՟· ڈޠ
12 V
é࠸ોϚڅྑກԧ éϨسڄԾቩԅЉɾྐԦç۱ᄔ࠱ɾࡴྐ
Ꮻ᜵ಗç̣̈́Ϛ JVC ԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋளකռé
WARNINGS
ᙲѿ
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Վ̊ഠཔçܿᙯϚϯ༫ʹጅ˃ۮçᔃළྐЖڄ࠷çՓӕЉྐཔ௲Ϧé
ë ϰ༬ҭ݉ੁͬઆ͵ጆڅϚሉࡍ๙ોгԿԾê
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of
4
Ω
to 8
Ω ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
ٍิ!
ëӕۘᎳീӦಗᖃ׆࠷மࡩڄۘᎳീéϨسۘᎳീગጛᖢçቁώ JVC ԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋ༿é
ë݈֜ۮಙᑵڄఛʨ᎔ʈ̷ᏻʨؠ 50 W çմۇӏ
4
Ω
- 8
Ω
éϨسఛʨ̷ʮؠ
50 W
çቁቆओ
“Amp Gain”
׆ࡩç̣Վ̊ಙᑵ๑ᖢéኌ՟·იاएڄ୶
21
ࡗé
ëՎ̊ྐഠཔçቁ·ഽሇઘ̸у ͶՠΈ ྐለڄၷʪé
ëʹጅ՟·݈çಞᇊ݃̕ᇊéϕЏçϚ୰̳ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ࠱᙮ညಞᇊ̕é
Heat sink
ಞᇊ̕
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
ྑກ֝ಚᑶወોሉٍิො!
ë ˞ˢӖಚᑶወዘሉોᏄોгྑЗèѵ۲͵ጆઆᘸࡍ๒ᖣê
ëϚӕಙᑵለᏃвಙᑵ˃ۮçᐓފԆԾʕڄಙᑵለཔé
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.
Έءϰ༬֝ોڅྒྷέ ʓλྒάᎲʹጅಏաéࠜЉέщးçቁΘո۽༿ڄ JVC ԆԾࡖᛏኀੋé
A
/
B
Hard case/Control panel
ഢୢվࡒػ
C
Sleeve
͙ࢭጅೋ
D
Trim plate
༫ྟख
E
Power cord
ྐཔ·ڄለӧ
I
Rubber cushion
ጁሗՎ࿑
F
Washer (ø5)
࿑ (ø5)
J
Handles
ػܓӕ˾
1
G
Lock nut (M5)
ᕬ׆ᒘ (M5)
K
Remote controller
ჲ
H
Mounting bolt (M5
×
20 mm)
ႌ֣ᒘन (M5 × 20 mm)
L
Battery
ྐЖ
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
ϰ༬༬éׇ֤ϛᄮڸؼ˗ ʓࡒڄ࿌༱ڷΕʄյܓڄϯ༫ദҺéϨسЉᖅçᄔ࠱Љᘕࢭ˔άڄཊऄçቁώ
JVC
ԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋࢭ˔άաᏻ˙͌༿é
ëϨسʿᇧ׆Ϩщᇧϙϯ༫ʹጅçᏻቁϐतڄӑிʆ࢜գϯ༫é
Do the required electrical connections.
නмᄔڄྐཔé
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.
Ҿᛮጅೋڄߴдçӕ͙ࢭጅೋԕ֣Ϛᄭ
ڷػ˖é
*
1
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
* 1 ৹ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ࠱๑ᖢנ௰ڄۘᎳീé
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
*
2
Fit the protrusions outside the unit.
* 2 અߴ̳௰˜ϯϚʹጅ͙௰é
։͵ጆ
Ϛ؛ֈʹጅۮçᏻઅʹጅ݈௰ڄ֣׆֜௰˜ᖑළé
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
ݝ࿌Εçઅղ̕ػܓӕ˾ʈ̿
ᆥç݈ძᗌϙનղώ͙ղ̕ӕ
˾çʹጅᎲ˃̳é
When using the optional stay /
ࠝΈ́ᆊނ
Fire wall
Վ̑ػ
Stay (option)
̀ᆉށ·ڄ
Dashboard
ᄭڷػ
Screw (option)
ᒘീਐ·ڄ
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
અʹጅϯ༫Ϛ˲ؠ
30˚
ڄԴܾé
When installing the unit without using the sleeve /
ࠝˀՠΈ͚ࢮጆೌϰ༬͵ጆ
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
̣ᕙΉ (TOYOTA) ԆԾբ ࡛ζ֊̳ԆԾЂࡖጅç݈અʹጅ༫ʈմڏ̳ڄтé
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm)
* 3
ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm) * 3
Bracket
* 3
Ёࣙ * 3
*
*
3
3
Not supplied for this unit.
ʿᎲʹጅಏաé
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm) * 3
ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm)
*
3
ڏೋ
Bracket * 3
Ёࣙ
*
3
Note :
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
ٍิ
:
ӕʹጅϯ༫ϚЁࣙʕइçੀͫ՟·
8 mm
ۂڄᒘീਐéϨ՟·ཫۂڄᒘീਐç๑ᖢʹጅé
Caution when installing /
ϰ༬ٍิො
Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.
• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).
અʹጅ·͗ࡴԴڄ༫ྟख֣׆ռϯ༫ࢭ˖é
• ʿ࠱ᐅᏫࡒػă࿌ˀڄఀᅬ௰˜Ąé
2
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A
Typical connections /
նܔڅોሉ̅٘
Before connecting:
Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
ྑཕો
ોሉۯ!
̥அᐓފԆԾ˖ڄለཔéʿᇧڄለࠓʹጅᘷࡌ๑ᖢé
ྐʍለڄ˺ለ֜ԾԽڄ˺ለϚᖄиʕ̈́Љʿψé
1
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2
Connect the antenna cord.
3
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
1
՜ຖʓ࿌Ε˃ЎҺྐለڄᖄиለé
2
અ˭ለڄྐለ৹գé
3
ఛ݈çӕለӧڄᏃϚʹጅʕé
If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car,
see diagram for speaker connection.
ϩشલϛԇԿϰ༬ʅʓಚᑶወԧè ቁኌ࿌ڷ Љᘕಙᑵé
To subwoofer (see diagram )
вඟࡌјࡖಙᑵኌ࿌ڷ
)
Antenna connector
˭ለ
LINE IN
(see diagram
/
ኌ࿌ڷ )
Rear ground terminal
ʹጅ݈ࠌϙၷʪ
Line out (see diagram )
᎔̳ၷʪኌ࿌ڷ
To external components (see diagram ) в͙இάኌ࿌ڷ
)
* 4 Not supplied for this unit.
*
4 ʿᎲʹጅಏաé
* 5
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.
* 5 ʹጅ͵ϯ༫इçනмʳѕٶٜᐓފ˃ۮç
ͫෝӕለʕçѴ۱ʿළ૧ྐé
15 A fuse
15 A ۘᎳീ
Black
෨и
Yellow * 5
෦и * 5
Red
߹и
Ignition switch
ᓭ̑ළᘕ
To metallic body or chassis of the car
вہᚙᝂԆԾנᇟ
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
вۘᎳീవ˔˖ڄۈᚙၷʪçۘᎳീవ˔ؠԾ༫ྐЖߟ
·ؠअཔᓭ̑ළᘕݔ׆ 12 V
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
вۘᎳീవ˔˖ڄۈᚙၷʪ
Fuse block
ۘᎳീవ˔
Blue
ᕇи
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
вбੂ˭ለࠜЉ༫ఛʨ 250 mA
Blue with white stripe
ᕇиઘЉΎиঙ
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
вմ̧༫ʕڄჲለఛʨ 200 mA
Orange with white stripe
ዻиઘЉΎиঙ
To car light control switch
вԆԾԾጜվළᘕ
Brown
ሶи
To cellular phone system
в˾ጅԦ
White with black stripe
ΎиઘЉ෨иঙ
White
Ύи
Gray with black stripe
НиઘЉ෨иঙ
Left speaker (front)
ͣಙᑵۮ
Gray
Ни
Green with black stripe
ႋиઘЉ෨иঙ
Right speaker (front)
͆ಙᑵۮ
Green
ႋи
Purple with black stripe
ാиઘЉ෨иঙ
Left speaker (rear)
ͣಙᑵ݈
Purple
ാи
Right speaker (rear)
͆ಙᑵ݈
3
ENGLISH ˁ̂
B
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer
/
ો͚ો؟ʩወ֝
/
චࡍљࡗಚᑶወ
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.
• For amplifier only:
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit.
̣̈́؞ʨ̣˥ঠڄԆԾΘᝂᑵԦé
•
અჲለᕇиઘЉΎиঙ֜մ̧༫ʕڄჲለ৹գç̣۔̣̈́ཫʹጅනм
ჲé
• ෯բ̸ୋ؟ʩወЪʶ!
– આಚᑶወ֝͵ጆᔄෆèκોʖ̸ୋ؟ʩወêઆ͵ጆڅಚᑶወોሉ؟ˀΈê
– ̣̈́ᘕ˖ᓼࡖՓઅࡖᏁۑ༙͐ݵ᎔в͙ᓼࡖ̣ᐺદଡಣڄࡖᛏ̣˪ᒼѠЂ
˖௰ᇊඹ႞ූăኌ՟·იاएڄ୶ 21 ࡗĄé
–
ʹጅڄ᎔̳ၷʪ̐ͦۘݠਢ̣̐ͦۘॡਢܾ෭ॲࡖᛏंسιЎ୕Άé
ະ͙௰̷؞ʨвʹጅइçቁᕢј͙௰̷؞ʨڄϯ੮࠳վ̣۔ᐺ֊ʹጅചಓ
ڄఛ՞ंسé
Remote lead
ჲለ
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
ჲለᕇиઘЉΎиঙ
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
YܓለʿᎲʹጅಏա
To the remote lead of other equipment or auto antenna if any
вմ̧༫ʕڄჲለбੂ˭ለࠜЉ༫
JVC Amplifier
JVC
̸ୋ؟ʩወ
Subwoofer
ඟࡌјࡖಙᑵ
Rear speakers
݈ಙᑵ
JVC Amplifier
JVC
̸ୋ؟ʩወ
Front speakers
ۮಙᑵ
Front speakers
ۮಙᑵ
JVC Amplifier
JVC
̸ୋ؟ʩወ
* 1
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 1 અϙለႩہᚙԾᝂږԆԾנᇟႌંçளᏻ༳ԅЉூٛွᕒႵϨسʵดʕٛွçϚྐለۮçઅٛွս̓éϨسʿᆟਭç̈́๑ᖢʹጅé
* 2
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 2 ۑ༙ྐងʿᎲʹጅಏա
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
4
ݮᄑਜ
•
ۙᎴുጜᔄê
* ᐓފ߹иለᏃ֜෨иለᏃݵѴ᙮ᇧ%
•
ྑກˀ়ોê
* ᐓފ෦иለᏃݵѴʕ%
•
ಚᑶወԆЊᑶࡗê
* ᐓފಙᑵ᎔̳ለᏃݵѴഠཔ%
•
ᑶࡗ͜ॳê
* ᐓފಙᑵ᎔̳ၷʪݵѴϙ%
* ᐓފಙᑵڄͣ (L) è͆ (R) ၷʪڄ࠷ (–) ݵѴθψϙ%
•
ࡗʹᓿࡗᛐê
* ݈ϙၷʪႩԾԽݵѴ՟·ཛഠ֜ཛ۹ڄྐለ%
•
͵ጆഛᇋê
*
ᐓފಙᑵ᎔̳ၷʪݵѴϙ%
*
ᐓފಙᑵڄͣ
(L)
è͆
(R)
ၷʪڄ࠷
(–)
ݵѴθψϙ%
•
͵ጆҭθˀ়ይіê
* ݵѴʵࡌڄጅஇ%
C
Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system /
ʓಚᑶወԧڅಚᑶወો
You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3-way network speaker system
(high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).
̣̈́ʒಙᑵԦăਢƄˀƄඟࡌјࡖಙᑵĄ̣۔ϚڄԆԾՙīঝଶڄࡖ
ᛏĬ̛ߍé
IMPORTANT:
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following.
• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for
HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For details about the setting, see pages 18 and 19 of the INSTRUCTIONS.
ࡍ࠲!
ϩشલϛԇԿϰ༬ʓಚᑶወԧèቂᇨׇ̤ʔ౧ᓮê
• Ϩ࿌ΕಙᑵԦé
• ՟·Ԧ˃ۮçζጒޥ˜Ꮑႎു֜ྖζ׆ቱະڄ HPF/LPF ă̈́·ఛਢᏁƄ̈́·ఛјᏁĄ ăॐѤݵ
HPF
ĄìѴ۱ç̈́͟๑ᖢಙᑵé
• ኌ՟·იاएڄ୶ 18 ֜ 19 ࡗЉᘕڄஅé
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output
ັཬಚᑶወ᎕̴ોಚᑶወĄਣƅˁą
White
Ύи
Left high-range speaker
ͣਢಙᑵ White with black stripe
ΎиઘЉ෨иঙ
Left mid-range speaker
ͣˀಙᑵ
Green
ႋи
Green with black stripe
ႋиઘЉ෨иঙ
Gray
Ни
Gray with black stripe
НиઘЉ෨иঙ
Purple
ാи
Purple with black stripe
ാиઘЉ෨иঙ
Connecting subwoofer /
ોචࡍљࡗಚᑶወ
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
ჲለăᕇиઘЉΎиঙĄ
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y ܓለăʿᎲʹጅಏաĄ
Remote lead
ჲለ
JVC Amplifier
JVC
̸ୋ؟ʩወ
To subwoofer out
вඟࡌјࡖಙᑵ
᎔̳
To LINE OUT (REAR)
в LINE OUT (REAR)
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to obtain more powerful sound
ັཬ͚ોᓽࡗወોಚᑶወĄਣƅˁą
—
̤ᐻધӧઢʩڅࡗᛐ
JVC Amplifier
JVC
̸ୋ؟ʩወ
JVC Amplifier
JVC
̸ୋ؟ʩወ
To LINE OUT (FRONT)
в LINE OUT (FRONT)
Left high-range speaker
ͣਢಙᑵ
Right high-range speaker
͆ਢಙᑵ
Left mid-range speaker
ͣˀಙᑵ
Right mid-range speaker
͆ˀಙᑵ
Right high-range speaker
͆ਢಙᑵ
Right mid-range speaker
͆ˀಙᑵ
Subwoofer
ඟࡌјࡖಙᑵ
* 3
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 3 અϙለႩہᚙԾᝂږԆԾנᇟႌંçளᏻ༳ԅЉூٛွᕒႵϨسʵดʕٛွçϚྐለۮçઅٛွս̓éϨسʿᆟਭç̈́๑ᖢʹጅé
* 4
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 4
ۑ༙ྐងʿᎲʹጅಏա
5
D
Connecting the external components /
ોյ̨͚ોஈέ
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD
ಘၫወé
Apple iPod®
JVC D. player
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) /
આ͚௱᎕ʉׇг
“Changer” (
ಘၫወ
) (
ኍՠΈკبऐڅ୷
21
ࡘê
)
You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod *
5
or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).
̣̈́નʓ࿌Εஇάẹ́̈́՟·ߍࡒቱʿక — KS-PD100 (iPod ·
KS-PD500 * player · iPod * 5 * player é
CAUTION /
ʯ˼
:
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
•
͙இά˃ۮçζᇧ׆ʹጅʵᘕé
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod
͏͙ᒯ or
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC D. player
͏͙ᒯ
JVC CD changer
JVC CD
ಘၫወ
CD changer jack
CD
ಗၪࣙ
*
5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
* 5 iPod ݵ Apple Computer, Inc. ăᙧسྐ༃˙͌ĄϚࠀ˪մ̧ࣁٌ̰ڄੋᆤé
*
6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer
*
6 ڄ CD ಗၪకڄྐង
Other external component /
յ̨͚ોஈέ
• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) /
આ͚௱᎕ʉׇг
“Ext In” (
͚௱᎕ʉ
) (
ኍՠΈკبऐڅ୷
21
ࡘê
)
External component
͚ોஈέ
CD changer jack
CD ಗၪࣙ
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
3.5 mm Θᝂᑵਁіࣙ
External component
͚ોஈέ
External component
͚ોஈέ
*
7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
* 7
ྐཔ᎔ʈቱ KS-U57 ʿᎲʹጅಏա
*
8 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
* 8
AUX ᎔ʈቱ KS-U58 ( ʿᎲʹጅಏա )
* 9 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*
9 ۑ༙ྐងʿᎲʹጅಏա
6
CD RECEIVER
RECEPTEUR CD
KD-SH1000
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
INSTRUCTIONS
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
GET0366-003A
[EX/EU]
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION:
Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3.
CAUTION:
Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
Notice:
The display window built in this unit has been produced with high precision, but it may have some ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not malfunction.
How to reset your unit
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card first (see page 14).
1
2
2
Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and
European countries
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on the unit’s chassis.
Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.
•
If this does not work, reset your unit.
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in
“More about this unit” (see pages 34 – 38).
Press briefly.
Press repeatedly.
Press either one.
Press
A
, then
B
.
Press and hold until your desired response begins.
Press and hold both buttons at the same time.
The following marks are used to indicate...
: Built-in CD player operations.
: External CD changer operations.
: SD player operations.
: External USB memory operations.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.
CONTENTS
Control panel ................................... 5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
............ 6
Getting started ................................. 7
Basic operations ............................................... 7
Radio operations .............................. 8
FM RDS operations ............................ 11
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ............................................... 11
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations .................................... 14
Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 14
Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 14
Playing from an SD card .................................... 14
Playing from a USB memory ............................. 15
Sound adjustments ........................... 18
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 18
Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 19
Activating crossover network ........................... 21
Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 21
General settings — PSM ................... 23
Title assignment .............................. 26 iPod®/D. player operations ................ 27
DAB tuner operations ........................ 29
Other external component operations ... 33
Maintenance .................................... 33
More about this unit ......................... 34
Troubleshooting ............................... 38
Specifications ................................... 42
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.
3
4
How to detach/attach the control panel
Detaching...
How to enter the various menus
The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,
PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).
• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds, menu screen is canceled.
1
2
Select a menu you want.
Attaching...
Time countdown indicator
3
Enter the selected menu.
1
How to change the control panel angle
2
When using the remote controller
• To go back to the previous screen or exit the MENU screen, press BACK repeatedly.
4
Operate as instructed on the screen.
• To go back to the MENU screen, press
MENU.
Caution:
How to change the display information and patterns
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
Source operation display
Text information display for
FM RDS stations and DAB services Clock time display
Large graphic display (full display size)
Control panel
Parts identification
Small graphic display
1
BAND button
2
SOURCE button
3
• Control dial
• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER button
4
MENU button
5
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
6
Display window
7
DISP (display) button
8
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
9
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button p
0
(eject) / (angle) button q
4
/
¢
buttons w
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
e
BACK button r
Reset button t
(control panel release) button
5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
Caution:
6
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume) for connection.
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.
Main elements and features
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
2
SOURCE button
Selects the source.
3
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
•
For DAB:
Changes the service.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the folders.
•
While listening to an Apple iPod
®
or a
JVC D. player:
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
∞
.
– Enters the main menu with
5
.
(Now
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
work as the menu selecting buttons.) *
4
VOL (volume) + / – buttons
Adjusts the volume level.
5
Number buttons
•
For FM/AM/DAB:
Selects the preset station (or service) if pressed, or store a station (or a service) if pressed and held.
• F
or CD/CD Text:
Selects the tracks.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Selects the folders.
•
For CD changer:
Selects the discs.
6
ANGLE button
Adjusts the control panel angle.
7
BAND button
Selects the band.
8
4
/
¢
buttons
•
For FM/AM/DAB:
Searches for stations
(or ensembles) if pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed and held.
•
For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the tracks if pressed, or fastforwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.
•
While listening to an iPod or a D. player
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
∞
to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
*
5
:
Returns to the previous menu.
∞
:
Confirms the selection.
Getting started
Activates or deactivates crossover network
(see page 21) before turning on the power.
Basic operations
~
Turn on the power.
Ÿ
FM/AM
=
DAB
*
=
CD
*
=
SD
*
=
USB
*
=
CD-CH
* /
iPod
* /
D. player
*
(or
EXT-IN
)
=
LINE-IN
=
(back to the beginning)
!
*
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.
For FM/AM tuner
For DAB tuner
⁄
Adjust the volume.
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 18 – 22.)
Continued on the next page
7
8
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press it again.
To turn off the power
Radio operations
~
Ÿ
!
Start searching for a station.
Selected band appears.
Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
23 – 26.
1
2
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching,
press the same button again.
To tune in to a station manually
In step
!
above...
1
1
Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “Demo,” then “Off.”
2
Setting the clock
Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust the minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or
“12Hours.”
3
Finish the procedure.
2
Select a desired station frequency.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
To check the current clock time while the power is turned off
3
4
MO indicator lights up.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.
To restore the stereo effect,
repeat the same procedure and select “Off” in step
3
. The MO indicator goes off.
Tuning in to FM stations with strong signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-
Extreme)
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to store into.
2
3
FM station automatic presetting —
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
4
4
DX indicator goes off and LO indicator lights up.
Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be detected.
To tune in to all receivable stations,
repeat the same procedure and select “DX” in step
3
. The
LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights up.
2
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
1
3
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
• If you hold down
5
/
∞
, the Preset Station
List appears (go to step
6
).
Continued on the next page
9
10
4
5
1
Listening to a preset station
2
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
6
Select a preset number.
4
• You can move to the lists of the other FM bands by turning the control dial.
7
Store the station.
5
Select a preset number.
When using the remote controller
After tuning in to a station you want to preset...
• You can move to the lists of the other FM bands by turning the control dial.
When using the remote controller
Directly select the preset number.
FM RDS operations
What you can do with RDS
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an additional signal along with their regular programme signals.
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the following:
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY
Standby Receptions (see pages 12 and 24)
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13)
• Programme Search (see page 13)
• Receiving the message service—RDS
Radiotext (RT) (see page 13)
Searching for your favorite
FM RDS programme
You can search for your favorite programmes being broadcast by selecting the PTY code of your favorite programmes.
PTY codes
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
~
Ÿ
Select a PTY code.
• You can select one of the PTY codes
(including the six preset codes which can be presetted as you like, see the following).
!
Start searching for your favorite programme.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme of the same PTY code as you have selected, that station is tuned in.
Storing your favorite programme types
You can store your favorite PTY codes into the
PTY Preset List.
1
2
Select a PTY code.
3
Enter the preset list.
1 Pop M
2 Rock M
3 Easy M
PTY Preset List appears.
4 Classics
5 Affairs
6 Varied
4
Select a preset number.
Continued on the next page
11
12
5
Store the setting.
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception
The TP indicator goes off.
6
7
To store other PTY codes into other preset numbers.
Finish the procedure.
Repeat steps
2
to
5
.
PTY Standby Reception
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any source other than AM.
• If DAB tuner is connected, Standby Reception also works to search for a DAB service.
To select your favorite PTY code for PTY
Standby Reception,
see page 24.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
Using the standby receptions
TA Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any source other than AM.
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the current level is lower than the preset level (see page 24).
• If DAB tuner is connected, Standby Reception also works to search for a DAB service broadcasting Traffic Announcement.
To activate the PTY Standby Reception
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
3
Select one of the PTY codes.
To activate TA Standby Reception
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator either lights up or flashes.
4
Finish the procedure.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby
Reception is activated.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby
Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening to an FM station without the RDS signals required for TA
Standby Reception.)
To activate TA Standby Reception,
tune in to another station (or DAB service) providing the related signals. The TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY
Standby Reception is activated.
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby
Reception is not yet activated.
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,
select “Off” in step
3
. The PTY indicator goes off.
Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception
When driving in an area where FM reception is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals (see the illustration below).
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)
Using the message service—
RDS Radiotext (RT)
What is RDS Radiotext
RDS Radiotext is part of the RDS data signal to transmit various text information (e.g. programme information, phone numbers, e-mail and web addresses, artist/title information, and news headlines). The text service is part of the RDS broadcast.
One message may contain up to 64 characters.
The message service is an optional service and is not supported by all broadcasters.
Once you tuned in to a station that supports the message service, the service is automatically received.
When shipped from the factory, Network-
Tracking Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception setting,
see “AF-Reg” on page 24.
To show the RDS Radiotext (RT) information
While listening to a station that supports RT...
Radiotext screen appears on the display.
• The Radiotext screen will be temporarily canceled when you operate the unit.
Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset station is tuned in.
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the same programme as the original preset station is broadcasting.
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another station using programme search.
• See also page 24.
It takes time to load data. While loading,
“Loading” and progress indications appear.
• You can see approximate loading percentage with the indications.
If text message is unavailable, the text screen will change to source operation screen. Yet, when text message becomes available later, the text screen will automatically appear.
13
14
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Playing from an SD card
Before detaching the control panel, turn off the power.
~
Ÿ
SD loading slot
To stop play and eject the disc
Note:
If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB” flashes on the display. If this happens, detach the USB memory, then, press
0
/ button again.
Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
*
If you have changed the external input setting to “Ext In” (see page 25), you cannot select the
CD changer.
SD card
Press in the SD card until you hear a clicking sound.
To eject the SD card,
press the SD card again.
• Press the SD card softly (do not release your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD card may pop out from the unit.
!
Attach the control panel.
Cautions:
• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory when it might hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all important data have been backed up to avoid losing the data.
⁄
• The control panel goes back to the previous position.
If an SD card or USB memory has been attached...
Playback starts automatically if tracks are recorded.
Playing from a USB memory
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a
USB memory.
All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.
~
Ÿ
USB input terminal
Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
• If a different SD card or USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.
About MP3 and WMA tracks
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
To fast-forward or reverse the track
USB memory
To detach the USB memory,
straightly pull it out from the unit.
Continued on the next page
15
To go to the next or previous tracks
4
Confirm the selection.
16
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3/WMA/SD/USB)
For MP3 tracks:
For WMA tracks:
The selected list appears on the display.
• You can move to the other list by turning the control dial.
5
Select a disc/folder/file from the list.
Current folder
• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List
( ) and Folder List ( / /
), see the following.
Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step
3
Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
If you select the current disc/folder
(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File
List appears.
6
Starts playback.
Other main functions
Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list
• This function is not available for an audio CD or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
When using the remote controller
• To directly select a disc ( )
• To directly select a track of an audio CD or a CD Text ( )
• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder
( / / )
To select a number from 1 – 6:
3
Select a list type.
To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):
*
1
Selectable only when the source is
“CD-CH.”
* 2
Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.
For MP3/WMA folders:
It is required that folders are assigned with
2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
1
2
After making sure “No Eject?” is selected...
• “No Eject” flashes, and the disc cannot be ejected.
To cancel the prohibition,
repeat the same procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is selected.
• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
3
Select one of the items (see the following table)
.
Intro Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...
Track
: All tracks of the current playback media. [ ]
Folder
* 1 : First track of all folders of the current playback media. [ ]
Disc
*
2
: First track of all the inserted discs.
[ ]
Off
: Cancels.
Repeat Plays repeatedly
Track
: The current track. [ ]
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder.
[ ]
Disc
* 2 : All tracks of the inserted discs.
Off
[
: Cancels.
]
Random Plays at random
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder, then
Disc
tracks of the next folder and so on.
[ ]
: All tracks of the current disc.
All
Off
*
3
[ ]
: All tracks of the inserted discs/ media. [
: Cancels.
]
* 1
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/
USB).
*
2
Only when the source is CD-CH.
* 3
Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.
4
Finish the procedure.
17
18
Sound adjustments
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
You can create a more acoustic sound field such as in a theater, hall, etc.
• When crossover network (see page 21) is activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”
DSP modes
Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,
Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—
Karaoke.)
To make more precise settings,
see the following.
To cancel the acoustic effect,
select “Defeat” in step
Ÿ
.
Precise settings for the DSP modes
1
Select a DSP mode.
2
Select the number of the built-in speakers.
• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker number is fixed to “4ch.”
~
Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select one of the DSP modes.
3
Select your listening seat position.
•
To finish the procedure
•
To adjust the effect level
Go to step
!
.
For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect level is not adjustable.
!
Adjust the effect level.
4
Select the speaker to be adjusted.
*
Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step
2
.
•
To finish the procedure
5
Select the distance between the selected speaker and the seat.
3
Finish the procedure.
Once you have set the distance, it is memorized for each seat position selected in step
3
. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select the seat position.
To change the measuring unit
Using the equalizer—EQ
You can adjust the sound equalization patterns to your preference by using either Graphic EQ or Parametric EQ.
• Adjust the equalizer to match the reproducible frequency range of the connected speakers; otherwise, the adjustments may not be effective.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the distance for the other speakers.
7
Finish the procedure.
Selecting preset sound modes—
Graphic EQ
Activating BBE Digital
BBE Digital is a digital processing method to restore the brilliance and clarity of the original live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach the ear than low frequency sounds.
BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship between the low, mid, and high frequencies by adding a progressively longer delay time to the low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.
1
Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).
2
Select the effect level.
1
2
Sound modes
Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B
(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,
Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
3
Select a sound mode.
4
Finish the procedure.
19
20
Storing your own sound modes
1
Select a sound mode.
2
Select a frequency band.
3
Select a band.
Band1
: 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz
Band2
: 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz
Band3
: 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz
4
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected band.
3
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected frequency band.
5
Select the frequency.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other frequency bands.
5
6
Select one of the user modes.
• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each other. (Only selectable frequencies are shown on the display.)
6
Select the band width (Q).
7
Store the adjustments.
• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.
Then repeat steps
3
to
6
.
7
Finish the procedure.
Adjusting Parametric EQ
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Once you have made adjustments, it is memorized. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select Parametric EQ.
Activating crossover network
By activating crossover network, you can allocate different frequency range of sound signals to different speakers to match their characteristic.
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following:
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For 3-way network speaker system, see
Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).
You cannot perform other operations until you finish the following procedure.
While the power is turned off...
~
Ÿ
To cancel Crossover,
repeat the same procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?” appears on the display.
• indicator goes off.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.
~
Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select a setting item.
*
Appears only when crossover network is activated (see left column).
When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or
“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER to enter its submenu.
!
Adjust the selected setting item.
(See the following for details.)
• To adjust other SEL settings, press
BACK. Then repeat steps
Ÿ
and
!
.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
!
To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal
•
Fad (fader)
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
•
To cancel the procedure,
press and hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power turns off.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
• indicator lights up (in sequence with other indicators).
•
Bal (balance)
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
21
22
To adjust reproduced frequency level—X-Over
This setting is available only when crossover network (see page 21) is activated.
1
Select a filter.
To adjust subwoofer output—
S.woofer
1
Adjust the output level.
HPF
(Front/Rear)
: Frequencies lower than the selected level are cut-off.
LPF (Rear)
: Frequencies higher than the selected level are cut-off.
2
Select “On” to activate the selected filter.
• If you connect high-range speakers to
Front or Rear output, select “On” for the corresponding HPF to prevent the speakers from being damaged.
2
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected subwoofer.
3
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
3
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected speakers.
1.6kHz – 16.0kHz
: Front HPF and Rear LPF
31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz
: Rear HPF
4
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
To adjust the input level of each source—Vol Adj
This setting is required for each source except for FM.
Once an adjustment is made, it will be memorized. When you change the source the volume level will automatically increase or decrease according to the adjusted level.
1
Select a source before entering the SEL menu.
2
Adjust to match the input level to the FM sound level.
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.
1
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
2
Select a PSM item.
3
Select or adjust the selected PSM item.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.
5
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Demo
Display demonstration
Anime
Animation
Clock H
Hour adjustment
Clock M
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
CLK Adj
Clock adjustment
Scroll
*
1
Items Settings, [reference page]
•
On
•
Off
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
0
–
23
(
1
–
12
)
[Initial: 0 (0:00)]
: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power, change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.
: Cancels.
: See also page 8 for setting.
00
–
59
[Initial: 00 (0:00)]
•
Off
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
12Hours
•
24Hours
[Initial]
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
Auto
[Initial] : The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock time) data in the RDS signal.
: Cancels.
•
Once
[Initial]
•
•
Off
[Initial]
Auto
: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].
: Cancels.
: For track information: scrolls the track information once.
For RDS Radiotext: scrolls the text message continuously.
For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.
: For track information: repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).
For RDS Radiotext: scrolls the text message continuously.
For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.
: For track information: cancels.
For RDS Radiotext: shows only the first page of the text message.
For DAB text: shows only headline if any.
Continued on the next page
23
24
Indications Items Settings, [reference page]
Dimmer
Bright
Display brightness
ID3 Tag
Tag display
Theme
Display theme
PTY Stby
PTY standby
AF-Reg
Alternate frequency/
Regionalization reception
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Auto
Off
On
[Initial]
Time Set
: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.
: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 25 for setting.
From: Any hour; To: Any hour
: Cancels.
: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)
1
–
10
[Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4” takes no effect.)
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
: Cancels.
Large
•
Small
(
1
(
1
[Initial] or
2
)
[Initial] or
29 PTY codes (see page 11)
[Initial: News]
•
AF
[Initial]
2
)
: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 26 for setting.
: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 26 for setting.
: Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [12].
AF Reg
Off
: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches to another station or service (the programme may differ from the one currently received), [13, 31].
: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.
: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to “ON”).
: When a traffic programme (TA) is received, the volume level automatically changes to the preset level.
TA Vol
Traffic announcement volume
P-Search
Programme search
0
–
30
or
50
[Initial: 15]
•
On
•
Off
[Initial]
*
2
IF Band
Intermediate frequency band
•
Auto
[Initial]
•
Wide
: Activates Programme Search, [13].
: Cancels.
: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
DAB AF
*
3
Alternative Frequency
Reception
Announce
*
3
Announcement
Standby Reception
•
On
[Initial]
• Off
9 announcement types (see page 31)
[Initial: Travel]
: Traces the programme among DAB services and FM RDS stations,
[31].
• The AF indicator lights up.
: Cancels.
: Select one of the announcement types for Announcement Standby
Reception.
Indications Items Settings, [reference page]
Beep
Key-touch tone
Ext In
* 4
External input
Tel
Telephone muting
Amp Gain
Amplifier gain control
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
•
Off
: Activates the key-touch tone.
: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
•
Changer
[Initial]
•
Ext In
: To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,
[27].
: To use any other external component, [32]
•
Muting 1/
Muting 2
•
Off
[Initial]
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.
• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.
: Cancels.
•
High PWR
•
Low PWR
: Volume 00 – Volume 50
: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)
: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
*
1
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
* 2
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
*
3
Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.
* 4
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.
Selecting timer for the dimmer
You can dim the display at night or as you set the timer.
1
Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu.
2
Select “Time Set.”
2
Set the dimmer end time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
3
Adjust the dimmer time.
1
Set the dimmer start time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
4
Finish the procedure.
25
26
Selecting the graphic theme
You can select the graphic theme for large and small display sizes (see also page 5).
1
Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.
2
Select the size of the display.
3
4
5
Select the theme.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the other display size and theme.
Finish the procedure.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer) and the external components (LINE-IN and EXT-IN).
Sources Maximum number of characters
CDs/CD-CH * Up to 32 characters (up to 30 discs)
External component
Up to 16 characters
*
You cannot assign names to any discs other than conventional CDs.
1
Select the sources.
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external component: Select
“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”
2
Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character set.
To show the selected display theme,
press
DISP repeatedly while playing a source.
A
(A – Z: upper case)
=
a
(a – z: lower case)
=
0
(numbers and symbols)
=
Á
(Accented letters: upper case)
=
á
(Accented letters: lower case)
=
(back to the beginning)
2
Select a character.
3
Move to the next (or previous) character position.
4
Repeat steps
1
and
3
until you finish entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
• To cancel the title entry without registration, press
MENU.
To erase the entire title
In step
3
...
Available characters
In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.
Accented letters: upper case
iPod®/D. player operations
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.
Before operating your iPod or D. player:
Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.
•
Interface adapter for iPod
®
—KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.
•
D. player interface adapter
—KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.
Caution:
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.
Preparations:
Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external input setting, see page 25.
~
Accented letters: lower case
Ÿ
Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused *
1
or stopped *
2 previously.
Numbers and symbols
Continued on the next page
27
28
!
Adjust the volume.
Selecting a track from the menu
1
Enter the main menu.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 18 – 22.)
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.
To pause
*
1
or stop
*
2
playback
To resume playback, press it again.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
*
1
For iPod
*
2
For D. player
Now the
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
buttons work as the menu selecting buttons * .
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
–
If no operations are done for about
5 seconds.
–
When you confirm the selection of a track.
2
Select the desired menu.
For iPod:
Playlists
Ô
Artists
Ô
Albums
Ô
Songs
Ô
Genres
Ô
Composers
Ô
(back to the beginning)
For D. player:
Playlist
Ô
Artist
Ô
Album
Ô
Genre
Ô
Track
Ô
(back to the beginning)
3
Confirm the selection.
To move back to the previous menu, press
5
.
• If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps
2
and
3
until the desired track is played.
• Holding
4
/
¢
can skip 10 items at a time.
Selecting the playback modes
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
3
Select an item (see table below).
4
Finish the procedure.
Repeat play
One
All
Off
: Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Mode
=
One” for the D. player.
: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode
=
All” for the D. player.
: Cancels.
Random play
Album
* : Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
Song
/
On
: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Off
Songs” of the iPod or “Random
Play
=
On” of the D. player.
: Cancels.
*
For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums” of the main “MENU.”
DAB tuner operations
What is DAB system?
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver digital quality sound without any annoying interference and signal distortion. Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and data. When transmitting, DAB combines several programmes (called “services”) to form one
“ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—called
“primary service”—can also be divided into its components (called “secondary service”). A typical ensemble has six or more programmes
(services) broadcast at the same time.
By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do the following:
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Alternative Frequency Reception (see
“DAB AF” on page 24).
It is recommended to use DAB tuner
KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have another DAB tuner, consult your JVC
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for your DAB tuner.
~
Ÿ
!
Start searching for an ensemble.
When an ensemble is received, searching stops.
To stop searching,
press the same button again.
Continued on the next page
29
30
⁄
Select a service (either primary or secondary) to listen to.
4
Finish the procedure.
To tune in to an ensemble manually
Start searching for an ensemble, as in step
!
...
1
2
Select a desired ensemble frequency.
• The DRC indicator will be highlighted only when receiving DRC signals from the tuned service.
To search for your favorite service
You can search for either Dynamic or Static
PTY codes.
• Operations are exactly the same as explained on pages 11 and 12 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the
DAB tuner and the FM tuner.
• Search will be performed on the DAB tuner only.
When surrounding sounds are noisy
Some service provides Dynamic Range Control
(DRC) signals together with their regular programme signals. DRC will reinforce the low level sounds to improve for your listening.
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select “DRC.”
Storing DAB services in memory
You can preset six DAB services (primary) for each band.
1
Select a service you want.
2
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
Select “List.”
3
Select one of the DRC signal levels (1,
2, or 3).
4
Select a preset number.
The reinforcement level increases from 1 to 3.
• You can move to the lists of the other
DAB bands, but cannot store a service for the other bands.
5
4
Store the service.
When using the remote controller
After tuning in to a service you want to preset...
1
Tuning in to a preset DAB service
2
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
Select “List.”
Select a preset number.
• You can move to the lists of the other
DAB bands by turning the control dial.
When using the remote controller
Directly select the preset number.
Using the Standby Receptions
TA (Road Traffic News) Standby
Reception
• Operations are exactly the same as explained on page 11 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot activate TA Standby Reception separately for the DAB tuner and for FM tuner.
• The volume changes to the preset TA volume level (see page 24).
PTY Standby Reception
• Operations are exactly the same as explained on page 11 for FM RDS stations.
• PTY Standby Reception for DAB tuner works only using a dynamic PTY code.
• You can neither store your favorite PTY nor activate PTY Standby Reception separately for the DAB tuner and for the FM tuner.
• You can activate and deactivate PTY Standby
Reception when the source is either “FM” or
“DAB.”
Announcement Standby Reception
Announcement Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite service (announcement type).
To select your favorite announcement type,
see page 24.
Announcement types
Travel, Warning, News, Weather, Event, Special, Rad Inf
(Radio Information), Sports, Finance
To activate the Announcement Standby
Reception
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select “Announce.”
Continued on the next page
31
32
3
4
Select an announce type.
Finish the procedure.
When shipped from the factory, Alternative
Frequency Reception is activated.
To deactivate the Alternative Frequency
Reception,
see page 24.
To show the Dynamic Label Segment (DLS) information
• If the ANN indicator lights up,
Announcement Standby Reception is activated.
• If the ANN indicator flashes,
Announcement Standby Reception is not yet activated.
To activate, tune in to another service providing these signals. The ANN indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.
To deactivate the Announcement Standby
Reception
Select “Off” in step
3
above.
• The ANN indicator goes off.
Lights up when receiving a service providing DLS.
Tracing the same programme—
Alternative Frequency Reception
You can keep listening to the same programme by activating the Alternative Frequency
Reception.
•
While receiving a DAB service:
When driving in an area where a DAB service cannot be received, this unit automatically tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS station, broadcasting the same programme.
•
While receiving an FM RDS station:
When driving in an area where a DAB service is broadcasting the same programme as the
FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit automatically tunes in to the DAB service.
Back to the beginning
• The DLS screen will be temporarily canceled when you operate the unit.
Other external component operations
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input
Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input
Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see pages 14 – 17; For iPod, or D.player, see pages
27 – 29.
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
~
LINE-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
LINE IN plugs.
EXT-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
CD changer jack.
If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 25 and select the external input (“Ext In”).
Ÿ
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
!
Adjust the volume.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 18 – 22.)
Connector
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its case,
press down the center holder of the case and lift the
Center holder disc out, holding it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case,
gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
Continued on the next page
33
34
To keep discs clean
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
How to handle SD card
SD cards are precision products. DO NOT impact, bend, drop, or wet them.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Stick-on label
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.
FM RDS operations
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme
Identification) and AF (Alternative
Frequency) to work correctly. Without receiving these data correctly, Network-
Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by
TA Standby Reception, the volume level automatically changes to the preset level (TA
VOL) if the current level is lower than the preset level.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated (with AF selected), Network-
Tracking Reception is also activated automatically. On the other hand, Network-
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated without deactivating Alternative Frequency
Reception. (See page 24.)
• Message service requires the RDS Radiotext signal. It is available on most major stations.
If reception is weak, the service may become unavailable. For any questions regarding the content of this service, please contact your broadcaster.
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
«http://www.rds.org.uk».
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.
• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been assigned to the audio CD (see page 26), it will be shown on the display.
• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/
WMA track, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down, the control panel moves down, and the disc automatically ejects from the loading slot.
• If you keep the control panel open for about
1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep” setting is turned “On”—see page 25) the control panel returns to its previous position.
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with “Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.
Playing an MP3/WMA discs
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,
1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.
• The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
Continued on the next page
35
36
– Romeo * : up to 128 (72) characters
– Joliet * : up to 64 (36) characters
– Windows long file name * : up to 128 (72) characters
*
The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is
313 or more.
• This unit can play back the files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a
USB memory
• While playing from an SD card or a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some
SD cards or USB memories due to their characteristics or recording conditions.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing some buttons on the control panel.
• If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, “No Files” appears and the unit returns to the previous source.
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
• For SD card: The maximum number of characters for folder name is 8 characters; file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot recognize folder with period (.) on the folder name.
For USB memory: The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.
• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of
255 files and 63 folders.
For USB memory: This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)
Sound adjustments
Selecting the DSP modes—DSP
• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the recording condition of the sources:
– Monaural sources such as AM and monaural FM broadcasting programs.
– Multiplex sound sources.
– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a chorus, or only a few instruments.
• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are used only to reproduce reflections and reverberations in order to creates a beingthere feeling in your car compartment.
• If fader or balance has been set close to its extreme, appropriate effect may not be obtained.
• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker number when “Defeat” is selected with crossover network activated.
Storing your own sound modes
• If you do not want to store your current adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment to the current playback source, press
MENU to go back to the operation screen of the current source. Adjustment you made remains effective until you select a sound mode.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to the center.
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.
• You cannot change the input level—
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to adjust it.
General settings — PSM
• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than
“Auto.”
• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 discs, “Name Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc in the unit and vise versa.
iPod® or D. player operations
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
D. player is charged through this unit.
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all operations from the iPod or D. player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or
D. player and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than
16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 23). This unit can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:
For iPod users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>
For D. player users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>
DAB tuner operations
• Only primary DAB services can be presetted even when you store a secondary service.
• A previously preset DAB service is erased when a new DAB service is stored in the same preset number.
Continued on the next page
37
38
Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode
Preset equalizing value
Sound mode
63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
00
00
00
+04
00 00
+06 +04 +04 +04
+02 00
00
+06 +06 +04 +0200
00
00
00
00
00 00 00
+02+04 +02
+02+02+02+06
+02+02+02+04
+06 +04 +02+02+02+02+02+06 +04
+08 +04 +0200 –04 –0200 +02+02
+04 +0200
+06 +0200
00
00
00 00 00 +02+04
+02+04 +04 +04 +06
Classic
User 1
+04 +06 +04 +0200
00 00 00 00 00
User 200
User 3 00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
+02+04
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “Connect Error” appears on the display.
• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the control panel movement is freezed.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “No Text” appears on the display.
• “Loading” does not disappear.
Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach it again (see pages 4 and 33).
Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the installation.
Store stations manually.
Connect the aerial firmly.
The station does not support RDS RT or the reception is weak.
Check the Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13).
The receiving signal is temporarily too weak to receive a complete message although the service is available.
Check the Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13).
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped.
Insert the disc correctly.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for recording.
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.
• Unlock the disc (see page 17).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading
Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).
Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Noise is generated.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders. • A longer readout time is required (“File
Check” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have intended them to play.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “No Music” appears on the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.
Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 26).
Continued on the next page
39
40
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Noise is generated.
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display while playing tracks from an SD card.
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes interrupted.
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• Readout time varies depending on the device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an appropriate format.
The track is unplayable.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then returns to the previous source.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted correctly.
The files included in the device are corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the display.
Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the device.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try again.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 26).
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
• “No Disc” appears on the display.
• “No Magazine” appears on the display.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes than “Defeat.”
• Only high range sound or low range sound is reproduced though full range speakers are connected.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press the reset button of the CD changer.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Deactivate crossover network (see page 21).
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does not work.
• Buttons do not work as intended.
• The sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display.
• Playback stops.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press
POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/
D. player.
Check the connecting cable and its connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart the playback operation using the control panel (see page
28).
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard when connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard.
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when connecting a D. player.
• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/
D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work after disconnecting from this unit.
• “No DAB Signal” appears on the display.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display.
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod or D. player.
Search for another ensemble.
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly and reset the unit (see page 2).
• The DAB tuner does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the display.
Check the DAB aerial and its connections.
•
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
SD logo is a trademark.
•
Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.
Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.
•
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
41
42
Specifications
Maximum Power
Output:
Continuous Power
Output (RMS):
Output Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
Other Terminals:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control
Range:
Frequencies:
Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz
(9 bands)
Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,
100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,
1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)
Level: ±10 dB
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Frequency Response:
Signal to Noise Ratio:
Level/Impedance: Line-In:
Line-Out:
70 dB
1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
LINE IN, CD changer
Frequency Range:
FM Tuner
FM:
AM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
MW Tuner
LW Tuner
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
Sensitivity:
30 dB
20 μV/65 dB
50 μV
Type: Compact disc player
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
Frequency Response:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
MP3: Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
98 dB
102 dB
Less than measurable limit
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
WMA: Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 320 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
MP3: Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
WMA:
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
Max. Current:
MP3:
WMA:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
FAT 12/16
8 MB – 512 MB
MP3/WMA
8 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 192 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
FAT 12/16/32
Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
MP3/WMA
Less than 500 mA
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
5 kbps – 320 kbps
8 kHz – 48 kHz
Power Requirement:
Grounding System:
Operating Voltage:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):
Panel Size (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
0°C to +40°C
182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
1.7 k g (excluding accessories)
43
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil
EN, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0106DTSMDTJEIN
KD-SH1000
Installation/Connection Manual
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
GET0366-010A
[EX/EU]
ENGLISH
This unit is designed to operate on
12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems
. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
0106DTSMDTJEIN
EN, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
FRANÇAIS
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de
courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE
.
Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
WARNINGS AVERTISSEMENTS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of
4
Ω
to 8
Ω ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Remarques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre
4
Ω
et 8
Ω
). Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amp Gain” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 25 du
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.
Heat sink
Dissipateur de chaleur
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.
A
/
B
Hard case/Control panel
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande
C
Sleeve
Manchon
D
Trim plate
Plaque d’assemblage
E
Power cord
Cordon d’alimentation
F
Washer (ø5)
Rondelle (ø5)
G
Lock nut (M5)
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)
H
Mounting bolt (M5
×
20 mm)
Boulon de montage (M5
×
20 mm)
I
Rubber cushion
Amortisseur en caoutchouc
J
Handles
Poignées
1
K
Remote controller
Télécommande
L
Battery
Pile
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING) INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie d’approvisionnement.
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien qualifié.
Do the required electrical connections.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour maintenir le manchon en place.
*
1
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
* 1
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
*
2
Fit the protrusions outside the unit.
* 2
Fixez les protubérances à l’extérieur de l’appareil.
Retrait de l’appareil
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en option
Fire wall
Cloison
Stay (option)
Hauban (en option)
Dashboard
Tableau de bord
Screw (option)
Vis (en option)
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm) * 3
Vis à tête plate (M5
×
8 mm)
* 3
* 3 Not supplied for this unit.
* 3
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
Bracket
* 3
Support
* 3
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm) * 3
Vis à tête plate (M5
×
8 mm)
*
3
Poche
Bracket
*
3
Support
* 3
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.
Note :
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Remarque :
Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm.
Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
Caution when installing / Précautions lors de l’installation
Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.
• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).
Fixez l’appareil sur le manchon de montage en utilisant les quatre coins de la plaque de garniture.
• NE POUSSEZ PAS sur le panneau (en gris sur l’illustration).
2
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A
If your car is equipped with the ISO connector / Si votre voiture est équippée d’un connecteur ISO
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
•
Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.
From the car body
De la carrosserie de la voiture
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel
(Vauxhall)
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.
•
Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.
Original wiring /
Câblage original
Modified wiring
1
/
Câblage modifié
1
ISO connector
Connecteur ISO
Use modified wiring
2
if the unit does not turn on.
Utilisez le câblage modifié
2
si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.
ISO connector of the supplied power cord
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation fourni
Modified wiring 2 /
Câblage modifié
2
View from the lead side
Vue à partir du côté des fils
Y: Yellow
Jaune
R: Red
Rouge
*
Choke coil
*
Bobine d’arrêt
B
Connections without using the ISO connectors / Connexions sans l’utilisation des connecteurs ISO
Before connecting:
Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1
Cut the ISO connector.
2
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
3
Connect the aerial cord.
4
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Avant de commencer la connexion:
Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.
1
Coupez le connecteur ISO.
2
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
3
Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
4
Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.
If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car,
see diagram for speaker connection.
Si vous avez installé un système d’enceintes à 3 voies,
référez-vous au diagramme pour la connexion des enceintes.
To subwoofer (see diagram )
Au caisson de grave
(voir le diagramme )
Aerial connector
Connecteur d’antenne
Rear ground terminal
Borne arrière de masse
Line out (see diagram )
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme )
To external components (see diagram )
Au appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme )
* 4 Not supplied for this unit.
* 4
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
* 5
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.
*
5
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.
LINE IN
(see diagram / voir le diagramme )
To steering wheel remote controller
(see diagram )
Pour la télécommande de volant
(voir le diagramme )
15 A fuse
Fusible 15 A
Ignition switch
Interrupteur d’allumage
Black
Noir
Yellow
Jaune
Red
Rouge
*
5
*
5
Blue with white stripe
Bleu avec bande blanche
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture
(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Fuse block
Porte-fusible
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
(200 mA max.)
Orange with white stripe
Orange avec bande blanche
Brown
Marron
To car light control switch
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
To cellular phone system
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
White with black stripe
Blanc avec bande noire
White
Blanc
Gray with black stripe
Gris avec bande noire
Left speaker (front)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Gray
Gris
Green with black stripe
Vert avec bande noire
Right speaker (front)
Enceinte droit (avant)
3
Green
Vert
Purple with black stripe
Violet avec bande noire
Left speaker (rear)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Purple
Violet
Right speaker (rear)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
ENGLISH FRANÇAIS
C
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Connexion de la télécommande de volant
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.
Steering wheel remote input
Entrée de la télécommande de volant
OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)
D
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer
/
Connexion d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou caisson de grave
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.
• For amplifier only:
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit.
Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre système stéréo.
•
Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
• Pour l’amplificateur seulement:
– Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.
– Vous pouvez désactiver l’amplificateur intégré et envoyer les signaux audio uniquement à un ou plusieurs amplificateurs extérieurs afin d’obtenir un son clair et pour éviter un échauffement interne de l’appareil (voir page 25 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
– Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi pour les sons reproduits par cet appareil.
Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à cet appareil, diminuez le réglage du gain sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.
Remote lead
Fil d’alimentation à distance
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
Subwoofer
Caisson de grave
Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
Front speakers
Enceintes avant
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
Front speakers (see diagram )
Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme )
* 1
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 1
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil).
L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
* 2
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them to the amplifier.
*
2
Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO de la voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.
* 3
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 3
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES
• Le fusible saute.
*
Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
*
Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• Pas de son des enceintes.
*
Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Le son est déformé.
*
Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
*
Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• Interférence avec les sons.
*
La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• L’appareil devient chaud.
*
Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
*
Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
4
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
*
Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
E
Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / Connexion des enceintes pour un système d’enceintes à 3 voies
You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3-way network speaker system
(high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).
Vous pouvez recréer un monde de “son pur” dans votre voiture en connectant un système d’enceintes à trois voies (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences/extrêmes graves).
IMPORTANT:
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following.
• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for
HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For details about the setting, see pages 21 and 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.
IMPORTANT:
Si vous avez installé un système d’enceintes à trois voies dans votre voiture, assurez-vous de ce qui suit.
• Connectez le système d’enceintes comme montré ci-dessous.
• Avant d’utiliser le système, mettez en service le réseau de transition et préréglez les fréquences de coupure appropriées pour HPF/LPF (plus spécialement pour HPF); sinon, les enceintes risqueraient d’être endommagées.
• Pour en savoir plus sur les réglages, référez-vous aux pages 21 et 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output
Lors de la connexion des enceintes (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences) aux sorties d’enceinte
White
Blanc
Left high-range speaker
Haut-parleur hautes fréquences gauche
White with black stripe
Blanc avec bande noire
Gray
Gris
Gray with black stripe
Gris avec bande noire
Left mid-range speaker
Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences gauche
Green
Vert
Green with black stripe
Vert avec bande noire
Purple
Violet
Purple with black stripe
Violet avec bande noire
Right high-range speaker
Haut-parleur hautes fréquences droit
Right mid-range speaker
Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences droit
Connecting subwoofer / Connexion du haut-parleur d’extrêmes graves
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Remote lead
Fil d’alimentation à distance
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
To subwoofer out
À la sortie du caisson de grave
Subwoofer
Caisson de grave
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to obtain more powerful sound
Lors de la connexion des enceintes (hautes fréquences/moyennes fréquences) à travers des amplificateurs extérieurs—pour obtenir un son plus puissant
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
To LINE OUT (REAR)
À LINE OUT (REAR)
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
To LINE OUT (FRONT)
À LINE OUT (FRONT)
Left high-range speaker
Haut-parleur hautes fréquences gauche
Left mid-range speaker
Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences gauche
Right high-range speaker
Haut-parleur hautes fréquences droit
Right mid-range speaker
Haut-parleur moyennes fréquences droit
* 4 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
* 4
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
* 5 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*
5
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
5
F
Connecting the external components / Connexion des appareils extérieurs
CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Changeur de CD, tuner DAB, iPod‚ Apple® ou lecteur D. JVC
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Choisissez “Changer” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Référez-vous à la page 25 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod * 6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).
Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur l’illustration. Le iPod
* 6
ou le lecteur
D. peut être connecté en utilisant un adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou
KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).
CAUTION / PRECAUTION:
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
• Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs, assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)
or
ou
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)
JVC DAB tuner
Tuner DAB JVC
CD changer jack
Prise du changeur de CD
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)
JVC CD changer
Changeur CD JVC
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)
or
ou
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)
JVC DAB tuner
Tuner DAB JVC
or
ou
JVC CD changer
Changeur CD JVC
CD changer jack
Prise du changeur de CD
* 6 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
* 6
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
*
*
7
7
Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or DAB tuner
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre changeur CD ou tuner DAB
Other external component / Autre appareil extérieur
• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Choisissez “Ext In” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Référez-vous à la page 25 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
External component
Appareil extérieur
CD changer jack
Prise du changeur de CD
External component
Appareil extérieur
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm
External component
Appareil extérieur
* 8 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
* 8
Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
* 9 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
* 9
Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
* 10 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 10
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
6
CD RECEIVER
CD-RECEIVER
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ
KD-SH1000
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 8.
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 8.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.
INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
GET0366-006A
[EY]
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION:
Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3.
CAUTION:
Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
Notice:
The display window built in this unit has been produced with high precision, but it may have some ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not malfunction.
How to reset your unit
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
• If an SD card is inserted, eject the SD card first (see page 14).
1
2
2
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on the unit’s chassis.
Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.
•
If this does not work, reset your unit.
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
How to read this manual
• Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained in
“More about this unit” (see pages 34 – 38).
Press briefly.
Press repeatedly.
Press either one.
Press
A
, then
B
.
Press and hold until your desired response begins.
Press and hold both buttons at the same time.
The following marks are used to indicate...
: Built-in CD player operations.
: External CD changer operations.
: SD player operations.
: External USB memory operations.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.
CONTENTS
Control panel ................................... 5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
............ 6
Getting started ................................. 7
Basic operations ............................................... 7
Radio operations .............................. 8
FM RDS operations ............................ 11
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ............................................... 11
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations .................................... 14
Playing a disc in the unit .................................. 14
Playing discs in the CD changer ........................ 14
Playing from an SD card .................................... 14
Playing from a USB memory ............................. 15
Sound adjustments ........................... 18
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP) ........................ 18
Using the equalizer—EQ ................................. 19
Activating crossover network ........................... 21
Setting the sound modes—SEL ...................... 21
General settings — PSM ................... 23
Title assignment .............................. 26 iPod®/D. player operations ................ 27
DAB tuner operations ........................ 29
Other external component operations ... 33
Maintenance .................................... 33
More about this unit ......................... 34
Troubleshooting ............................... 38
Specifications ................................... 42
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.
3
4
How to detach/attach the control panel
Detaching...
How to enter the various menus
The main menu contains seven menus (MODE,
PSM, SEL, TITLE, BBE, EQ, DSP).
• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds, menu screen is canceled.
1
2
Select a menu you want.
Attaching...
Time countdown indicator
3
Enter the selected menu.
1
How to change the control panel angle
2
When using the remote controller
• To go back to the previous screen or exit the MENU screen, press BACK repeatedly.
4
Operate as instructed on the screen.
• To go back to the MENU screen, press
MENU.
Caution:
How to change the display information and patterns
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source
Source operation display
Text information display for
FM RDS stations and DAB services
Clock time display
Large graphic display (full display size)
Control panel
Parts identification
Small graphic display
1
BAND button
2
SOURCE button
3
• Control dial
• POWER/ATT (attenuator)/ENTER button
4
MENU button
5
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
6
Display window
7
DISP (display) button
8
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
9
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button p
0
(eject) / (angle) button q
4
/
¢
buttons w
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
e
BACK button r
Reset button t
(control panel release) button
5
Remote controller —
RM-RK300
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
Caution:
6
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume) for connection.
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.
Main elements and features
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
2
SOURCE button
Selects the source.
3
5
(up) /
∞
(down) buttons
•
For DAB:
Changes the service.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the folders.
•
While listening to an Apple iPod
®
or a
JVC D. player:
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
∞
.
– Enters the main menu with
5
.
(Now
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
work as the menu selecting buttons.) *
4
VOL (volume) + / – buttons
Adjusts the volume level.
5
Number buttons
•
For FM/AM/DAB:
Selects the preset station (or service) if pressed, or store a station (or a service) if pressed and held.
• F
or CD/CD Text:
Selects the tracks.
•
For MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Selects the folders.
•
For CD changer:
Selects the discs.
6
ANGLE button
Adjusts the control panel angle.
7
BAND button
Selects the band.
8
4
/
¢
buttons
•
For FM/AM/DAB:
Searches for stations
(or ensembles) if pressed, or skips frequencies after pressed and held.
•
For CD/CD Text/MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
Changes the tracks if pressed, or fastforwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.
•
While listening to an iPod or a D. player
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
∞
to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
*
5
:
Returns to the previous menu.
∞
:
Confirms the selection.
Getting started
Activates or deactivates crossover network
(see page 21) before turning on the power.
Basic operations
~
Turn on the power.
Ÿ
FM/AM
=
DAB
*
=
CD
*
=
SD
*
=
USB
*
=
CD-CH
* /
iPod
* /
D. player
*
(or
EXT-IN
)
=
LINE-IN
=
(back to the beginning)
!
*
You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.
For FM/AM tuner
For DAB tuner
⁄
Adjust the volume.
@
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 18 – 22.)
Continued on the next page
7
8
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press it again.
To turn off the power
Radio operations
~
Ÿ
!
Start searching for a station.
Selected band appears.
Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
23 – 26.
1
2
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching,
press the same button again.
To tune in to a station manually
In step
!
above...
1
1
Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “Demo,” then “Off.”
2
Setting the clock
Select “Clock H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “Clock M” (minute), then adjust the minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24Hours” or
“12Hours.”
3
Finish the procedure.
2
Select a desired station frequency.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
To check the current clock time while the power is turned off
3
4
MO indicator lights up.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.
To restore the stereo effect,
repeat the same procedure and select “Off” in step
3
. The MO indicator goes off.
Tuning in to FM stations with strong signals only—LO (local)/DX (Distance-
Extreme)
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Memory)
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to store into.
2
3
FM station automatic presetting —
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
4
4
DX indicator goes off and LO indicator lights up.
Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be detected.
To tune in to all receivable stations,
repeat the same procedure and select “DX” in step
3
. The
LO indicator goes off and DX indicator lights up.
2
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
1
3
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
• If you hold down
5
/
∞
, the Preset Station
List appears (go to step
6
).
Continued on the next page
9
10
4
5
Listening to a preset station
1
2
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
6
Select a preset number.
4
• You can move to the lists of the other FM bands by turning the control dial.
7
Store the station.
5
Select a preset number.
When using the remote controller
After tuning in to a station you want to preset...
• You can move to the lists of the other FM bands by turning the control dial.
When using the remote controller
Directly select the preset number.
FM RDS operations
What you can do with RDS
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an additional signal along with their regular programme signals.
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the following:
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY
Standby Receptions (see pages 12 and 24)
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13)
• Programme Search (see page 13)
• Receiving the message service—RDS
Radiotext (RT) (see page 13)
Searching for your favorite
FM RDS programme
You can search for your favorite programmes being broadcast by selecting the PTY code of your favorite programmes.
PTY codes
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
~
Ÿ
Select a PTY code.
• You can select one of the PTY codes
(including the six preset codes which can be presetted as you like, see the following).
!
Start searching for your favorite programme.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme of the same PTY code as you have selected, that station is tuned in.
Storing your favorite programme types
You can store your favorite PTY codes into the
PTY Preset List.
1
2
Select a PTY code.
3
Enter the preset list.
1 Pop M
2 Rock M
3 Easy M
PTY Preset List appears.
4 Classics
5 Affairs
6 Varied
4
Select a preset number.
Continued on the next page
11
12
5
Store the setting.
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception
The TP indicator goes off.
6
7
To store other PTY codes into other preset numbers.
Finish the procedure.
Repeat steps
2
to
5
.
PTY Standby Reception
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any source other than AM.
• If DAB tuner is connected, Standby Reception also works to search for a DAB service.
To select your favorite PTY code for PTY
Standby Reception,
see page 24.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
Using the standby receptions
TA Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any source other than AM.
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the current level is lower than the preset level (see page 24).
• If DAB tuner is connected, Standby Reception also works to search for a DAB service broadcasting Traffic Announcement.
To activate the PTY Standby Reception
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
3
Select one of the PTY codes.
To activate TA Standby Reception
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator either lights up or flashes.
4
Finish the procedure.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby
Reception is activated.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby
Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening to an FM station without the RDS signals required for TA
Standby Reception.)
To activate TA Standby Reception,
tune in to another station (or DAB service) providing the related signals. The TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY
Standby Reception is activated.
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby
Reception is not yet activated.
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,
select “Off” in step
3
. The PTY indicator goes off.
Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception
When driving in an area where FM reception is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals (see the illustration below).
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)
Using the message service—
RDS Radiotext (RT)
What is RDS Radiotext
RDS Radiotext is part of the RDS data signal to transmit various text information (e.g. programme information, phone numbers, e-mail and web addresses, artist/title information, and news headlines). The text service is part of the RDS broadcast.
One message may contain up to 64 characters.
The message service is an optional service and is not supported by all broadcasters.
Once you tuned in to a station that supports the message service, the service is automatically received.
When shipped from the factory, Network-
Tracking Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception setting,
see “AF-Reg” on page 24.
To show the RDS Radiotext (RT) information
While listening to a station that supports RT...
Radiotext screen appears on the display.
• The Radiotext screen will be temporarily canceled when you operate the unit.
Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset station is tuned in.
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the same programme as the original preset station is broadcasting.
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another station using programme search.
• See also page 24.
It takes time to load data. While loading,
“Loading” and progress indications appear.
• You can see approximate loading percentage with the indications.
If text message is unavailable, the text screen will change to source operation screen. Yet, when text message becomes available later, the text screen will automatically appear.
13
14
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Playing from an SD card
Before detaching the control panel, turn off the power.
~
Ÿ
SD loading slot
To stop play and eject the disc
Note:
If a USB memory is attached to the unit, you cannot eject the disc. “Please Eject USB” flashes on the display. If this happens, detach the USB memory, then, press
0
/ button again.
Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
*
If you have changed the external input setting to “Ext In” (see page 25), you cannot select the
CD changer.
SD card
Press in the SD card until you hear a clicking sound.
To eject the SD card,
press the SD card again.
• Press the SD card softly (do not release your finger quickly); otherwise, the SD card may pop out from the unit.
!
Attach the control panel.
Cautions:
• Avoid using the SD card/USB memory when it might hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all important data have been backed up to avoid losing the data.
⁄
• The control panel goes back to the previous position.
If an SD card or USB memory has been attached...
Playback starts automatically if tracks are recorded.
Playing from a USB memory
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a
USB memory.
All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.
• Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.
~
Ÿ
USB input terminal
Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
• If a different SD card or USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.
About MP3 and WMA tracks
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC
MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
To fast-forward or reverse the track
USB memory
To detach the USB memory,
straightly pull it out from the unit.
Continued on the next page
15
To go to the next or previous tracks
4
Confirm the selection.
16
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3/WMA/SD/USB)
For MP3 tracks:
For WMA tracks:
The selected list appears on the display.
• You can move to the other list by turning the control dial.
5
Select a disc/folder/file from the list.
Current folder
• Holding the buttons can display the Disc List
( ) and Folder List ( / /
), see the following.
Ex.: When “Folder” is selected on step
3
Only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB:
If you select the current disc/folder
(highlighted on the screen), its Folder/File
List appears.
6
Starts playback.
Other main functions
Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list
• This function is not available for an audio CD or a CD Text when the source is “CD.”
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
When using the remote controller
• To directly select a disc ( )
• To directly select a track of an audio CD or a CD Text ( )
• To directly select an MP3/WMA folder
( / / )
To select a number from 1 – 6:
3
Select a list type.
To select a number from 7 (1) – 12 (6):
*
1
Selectable only when the source is
“CD-CH.”
*
2
Appears only for MP3/WMA/SD/USB.
For MP3/WMA folders:
It is required that folders are assigned with
2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
1
2
After making sure “No Eject?” is selected...
• “No Eject” flashes, and the disc cannot be ejected.
To cancel the prohibition,
repeat the same procedure after making sure “Eject OK?” is selected.
• “Eject OK” flashes on the display.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
3
Select one of the items (see the following table)
.
Intro Plays the beginning 15 seconds of...
Track
: All tracks of the current playback media. [ ]
Folder
*
1
: First track of all folders of the current playback media. [ ]
Disc
* 2 : First track of all the inserted discs.
Off
[
: Cancels.
]
Repeat Plays repeatedly
Track
: The current track. [ ]
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder.
[ ]
Disc
* 2 : All tracks of the inserted discs.
[ ]
Off
: Cancels.
Random Plays at random
Folder
*
1
: All tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folder and so on.
Disc
All
Off
*
3
[ ]
: All tracks of the current disc.
[ ]
: All tracks of the inserted discs/ media. [
: Cancels.
]
*
1
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/SD/
USB).
* 2
Only when the source is CD-CH.
*
3
Only when the source is CD-CH, SD, or USB.
4
Finish the procedure.
17
18
Sound adjustments
To make more precise settings,
see the following.
Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
You can create a more acoustic sound field such as in a theater, hall, etc.
• When crossover network (see page 21) is activated, the DSP mode is fixed to “Defeat.”
DSP modes
Defeat (No acoustic effect is applied), Theater, Hall,
Club, Dome, Studio, V.Cancel (Voice Cancel: Reduces the vocal sounds. Good for mastering your favorite songs—
Karaoke.)
To cancel the acoustic effect,
select “Defeat” in step
Ÿ
.
Precise settings for the DSP modes
1
Select a DSP mode.
2
Select the number of the built-in speakers.
• For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the speaker number is fixed to “4ch.”
~
Enter the DSP menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select one of the DSP modes.
3
Select your listening seat position.
•
To finish the procedure
•
To adjust the effect level
Go to step
!
.
For “Defeat” and “V.Cancel,” the effect level is not adjustable.
!
Adjust the effect level.
4
Select the speaker to be adjusted.
*
Appears only when “4ch” is selected in step
2
.
•
To finish the procedure
5
Select the distance between the selected speaker and the seat.
3
Finish the procedure.
Once you have set the distance, it is memorized for each seat position selected in step
3
. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select the seat position.
To change the measuring unit
Using the equalizer—EQ
You can adjust the sound equalization patterns to your preference by using either Graphic EQ or Parametric EQ.
• Adjust the equalizer to match the reproducible frequency range of the connected speakers; otherwise, the adjustments may not be effective.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the
7 distance for the other speakers.
Finish the procedure.
Selecting preset sound modes—
Graphic EQ
Sound modes
Flat (No sound mode is applied), HardRock, R&B
(Rhythm&Blues), Pop, Jazz, Dance, Country, Reggae,
Classic, User 1, User 2, User 3
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Activating BBE Digital
BBE Digital is a digital processing method to restore the brilliance and clarity of the original live sound in recording, broadcasts, etc. When a speaker reproduces sound, it introduces frequency-dependent phase shifting, causing high-frequency sounds to take longer to reach the ear than low frequency sounds.
BBE Digital adjusts the phase relationship between the low, mid, and high frequencies by adding a progressively longer delay time to the low and mid frequencies, so that all frequencies reach the listener’s ears at the proper time. A more brilliance and clearer sound is heard.
1
Enter the BBE menu (see page 4).
2
Select the effect level.
3
Select a sound mode.
4
Finish the procedure.
19
20
Storing your own sound modes
1
Select a sound mode.
2
Select a frequency band.
3
Select a band.
Band1
: 20.0 Hz – 1.2 kHz
Band2
: 80.0 Hz – 5.0 kHz
Band3
: 315.0 Hz – 20 kHz
4
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected band.
3
Adjust the enhanced level for the selected frequency band.
5
Select the frequency.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other frequency bands.
5
6
Select one of the user modes.
• Band 1/2/3 are required to be preset at least 5 steps (frequencies) away from each other. (Only selectable frequencies are shown on the display.)
6
Select the band width (Q).
7
Store the adjustments.
• To adjust the other bands, press BACK.
Then repeat steps
3
to
6
.
7
Finish the procedure.
Adjusting Parametric EQ
1
Enter the EQ menu (see page 4).
2
Once you have made adjustments, it is memorized. The memorized setting is recalled next time you select Parametric EQ.
Activating crossover network
By activating crossover network, you can allocate different frequency range of sound signals to different speakers to match their characteristic.
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following:
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF (especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For 3-way network speaker system, see
Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).
You cannot perform other operations until you finish the following procedure.
While the power is turned off...
~
Ÿ
To cancel Crossover,
repeat the same procedure. Make sure that “X-Over Off OK?” appears on the display.
• indicator goes off.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.
~
Enter the SEL menu (see page 4).
Ÿ
Select a setting item.
*
Appears only when crossover network is activated (see left column).
When selecting “Fad/Bal,” “X-Over,” or
“S.woofer,” press POWER/ATT/ENTER to enter its submenu.
!
Adjust the selected setting item.
(See the following for details.)
• To adjust other SEL settings, press
BACK. Then repeat steps
Ÿ
and
!
.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
!
To adjust fader and balance—Fad/Bal
•
Fad (fader)
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
•
To cancel the procedure,
press and hold POWER/ATT/ENTER. The power turns off.
⁄
Finish the procedure.
• indicator lights up (in sequence with other indicators).
•
Bal (balance)
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
21
22
To adjust reproduced frequency level—X-Over
This setting is available only when crossover network (see page 21) is activated.
1
Select a filter.
To adjust subwoofer output—
S.woofer
1
Adjust the output level.
HPF
(Front/Rear)
: Frequencies lower than the selected level are cut-off.
LPF (Rear)
: Frequencies higher than the selected level are cut-off.
2
Select “On” to activate the selected filter.
• If you connect high-range speakers to
Front or Rear output, select “On” for the corresponding HPF to prevent the speakers from being damaged.
2
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected subwoofer.
3
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
3
Select a cut-off frequency according to the connected speakers.
1.6kHz – 16.0kHz
: Front HPF and Rear LPF
31.5 Hz – 200.0Hz
: Rear HPF
4
Adjust the continuity of the sound among speakers (slope).
To adjust the input level of each source—Vol Adj
This setting is required for each source except for FM.
Once an adjustment is made, it will be memorized. When you change the source the volume level will automatically increase or decrease according to the adjusted level.
1
Select a source before entering the SEL menu.
2
Adjust to match the input level to the FM sound level.
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.
1
Enter the PSM menu (see page 4).
2
Select a PSM item.
3
Select or adjust the selected PSM item.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.
5
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Demo
Display demonstration
Anime
Animation
Clock H
Hour adjustment
Clock M
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
CLK Adj
Clock adjustment
Scroll
* 1
Items Settings, [reference page]
•
•
•
On
Off
On
[Initial]
[Initial]
: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds, [8].
: Cancels.
: An animation screen appears when you turn on or off the power, change the source, and when you select an EQ, MENU, or DSP.
: Cancels.
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
Off
0
–
23
(
1
–
12
)
[Initial: 0 (0:00)]
00
–
59
[Initial: 00 (0:00)]
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
12Hours
•
24Hours
[Initial]
•
Auto
[Initial]
: See also page 8 for setting.
•
Off
: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock time) data in the RDS signal.
: Cancels.
•
Once
[Initial]
•
•
Auto
Off
: For track information: scrolls the track information once.
For RDS Radiotext: scrolls the text message continuously.
For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.
: For track information: repeats scrolling (in 5-second intervals in between).
For RDS Radiotext: scrolls the text message continuously.
For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.
: For track information: cancels.
For RDS Radiotext: shows only the first page of the text message.
For DAB text: shows only headline if any.
Continued on the next page
23
24
Indications Items Settings, [reference page]
Dimmer
Bright
Display brightness
ID3 Tag
Tag display
Theme
Display theme
PTY Stby
PTY standby
AF-Reg
Alternate frequency/
Regionalization reception
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Auto
Off
On
[Initial]
Time Set
: Dims the display when you turn on the headlights.
: Sets the timer for dimmer, see page 25 for setting.
From: Any hour; To: Any hour
: Cancels.
: Activates dimmer. (Does not work if “Bright” is set to “1.”)
1
–
10
[Initial: 8] : Adjust the display contrast to make the display indications clear and legible. (If “Dimmer” is set to “On,” selecting “1” to “4” takes no effect.)
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
: Cancels.
Large
•
Small
(
1
(
1
[Initial] or
2
)
[Initial] or
29 PTY codes (see page 11)
[Initial: News]
•
AF
[Initial]
2
)
: Select the display theme for large graphic display, [5]. See page 26 for setting.
: Select the display theme for small graphic display, [5]. See page 26 for setting.
: Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [12].
AF Reg
Off
: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches to another station or service (the programme may differ from the one currently received), [13, 31].
: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.
: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to “ON”).
: When a traffic programme (TA) is received, the volume level automatically changes to the preset level.
TA Vol
Traffic announcement volume
P-Search
Programme search
0
–
30
or
[Initial: 15]
50
•
On
•
Off
[Initial]
* 2
IF Band
Intermediate frequency band
•
Auto
[Initial]
•
Wide
: Activates Programme Search, [13].
: Cancels.
: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
DAB AF
*
3
Alternative Frequency
Reception
Announce
*
3
Announcement
Standby Reception
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
9 announcement types (see page 31)
[Initial: Travel]
: Traces the programme among DAB services and FM RDS stations,
[31].
• The AF indicator lights up.
: Cancels.
: Select one of the announcement types for Announcement Standby
Reception.
Indications
Beep
Key-touch tone
Ext In
*
4
External input
Tel
Telephone muting
Amp Gain
Amplifier gain control
Items Settings, [reference page]
•
On
[Initial]
•
Off
: Activates the key-touch tone.
: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
•
Changer
[Initial]
•
Ext In
: To use a JVC CD changer, [14] or an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player,
[27].
: To use any other external component, [32]
•
Muting 1/
Muting 2
•
•
•
•
Off
High PWR
Low PWR
Off
[Initial]
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.
• If CD/CD-CH/SD/USB/iPod/D. player has been selected as the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.
: Cancels.
: Volume 00 – Volume 50
: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speakers.)
: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
* 1
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
* 2
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
*
3
Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.
* 4
Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, CD, SD, USB, or LINE-IN.
Selecting timer for the dimmer
You can dim the display at night or as you set the timer.
1
Select “Dimmer” from the PSM menu.
2
Select “Time Set.”
2
Set the dimmer end time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
3
Adjust the dimmer time.
1
Set the dimmer start time.
24Hours
: [0 – 23]
12Hours
: [1A (1AM) – 12A (12AM);
1P (1PM) – 12P (12PM)]
4
Finish the procedure.
25
26
Selecting the graphic theme
You can select the graphic theme for large and small display sizes (see also page 5).
1
Select “Theme” from the PSM menu.
2
Select the size of the display.
3
4
5
Select the theme.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the other display size and theme.
Finish the procedure.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer) and the external components (LINE-IN and EXT-IN).
Sources Maximum number of characters
CDs/CD-CH * Up to 32 characters (up to 30 discs)
External component
Up to 16 characters
*
You cannot assign names to any discs other than conventional CDs.
1
Select the sources.
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external component: Select
“LINE-IN” or “EXT-IN.”
2
Enter the TITLE menu (see page 4).
3
Assign a title.
1
Select a character set.
To show the selected display theme,
press
DISP repeatedly while playing a source.
A
(A – Z: upper case)
=
a
(a – z: lower case)
=
0
(numbers and symbols)
=
Á
(Accented letters: upper case)
=
á
(Accented letters: lower case)
=
(back to the beginning)
2
Select a character.
3
Move to the next (or previous) character position.
4
Repeat steps
1
and
3
until you finish entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
• To cancel the title entry without registration, press
MENU.
To erase the entire title
In step
3
...
Available characters
In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z, a – z), the following characters will be used.
Accented letters: upper case
iPod®/D. player operations
This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.
Before operating your iPod or D. player:
Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.
•
Interface adapter for iPod
®
—KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.
•
D. player interface adapter
—KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.
Caution:
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.
Preparations:
Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external input setting, see page 25.
~
Accented letters: lower case
Ÿ
Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused *
1
or stopped *
2 previously.
Numbers and symbols
Continued on the next page
27
28
!
Adjust the volume.
Selecting a track from the menu
1
Enter the main menu.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 18 – 22.)
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.
To pause
*
1
or stop
*
2
playback
To resume playback, press it again.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
* 1
For iPod
*
2
For D. player
Now the
5
/
∞
/
4
/
¢
buttons work as the menu selecting buttons * .
*
The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
–
If no operations are done for about
5 seconds.
–
When you confirm the selection of a track.
2
Select the desired menu.
For iPod:
Playlists
Ô
Artists
Ô
Albums
Ô
Songs
Ô
Genres
Ô
Composers
Ô
(back to the beginning)
For D. player:
Playlist
Ô
Artist
Ô
Album
Ô
Genre
Ô
Track
Ô
(back to the beginning)
3
Confirm the selection.
To move back to the previous menu, press
5
.
• If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps
2
and
3
until the desired track is played.
• Holding
4
/
¢
can skip 10 items at a time.
Selecting the playback modes
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select one of the playback modes.
3
Select an item (see table below).
4
Finish the procedure.
Repeat play
One
All
Off
: Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Mode
=
One” for the D. player.
: Functions the same as “Repeat
All” of the iPod or “Repeat Mode
=
All” for the D. player.
: Cancels.
Random play
Album
* : Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod.
Song
/
On
: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Off
Songs” of the iPod or “Random
Play
=
On” of the D. player.
: Cancels.
*
For iPod: Only if you select “All” in “Albums” of the main “MENU.”
DAB tuner operations
What is DAB system?
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver digital quality sound without any annoying interference and signal distortion. Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and data. When transmitting, DAB combines several programmes (called “services”) to form one
“ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—called
“primary service”—can also be divided into its components (called “secondary service”). A typical ensemble has six or more programmes
(services) broadcast at the same time.
By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do the following:
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Alternative Frequency Reception (see
“DAB AF” on page 24).
It is recommended to use DAB tuner
KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have another DAB tuner, consult your JVC
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for your DAB tuner.
~
Ÿ
!
Start searching for an ensemble.
When an ensemble is received, searching stops.
To stop searching,
press the same button again.
Continued on the next page
29
30
⁄
Select a service (either primary or secondary) to listen to.
4
Finish the procedure.
To tune in to an ensemble manually
Start searching for an ensemble, as in step
!
...
1
2
Select a desired ensemble frequency.
• The DRC indicator will be highlighted only when receiving DRC signals from the tuned service.
To search for your favorite service
You can search for either Dynamic or Static
PTY codes.
• Operations are exactly the same as explained on pages 11 and 12 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the
DAB tuner and the FM tuner.
• Search will be performed on the DAB tuner only.
When surrounding sounds are noisy
Some service provides Dynamic Range Control
(DRC) signals together with their regular programme signals. DRC will reinforce the low level sounds to improve for your listening.
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select “DRC.”
Storing DAB services in memory
You can preset six DAB services (primary) for each band.
1
Select a service you want.
2
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
Select “List.”
3
Select one of the DRC signal levels (1,
2, or 3).
4
Select a preset number.
The reinforcement level increases from 1 to 3.
• You can move to the lists of the other
DAB bands, but cannot store a service for the other bands.
5
4
Store the service.
When using the remote controller
After tuning in to a service you want to preset...
1
Tuning in to a preset DAB service
2
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
3
Select “List.”
Select a preset number.
• You can move to the lists of the other
DAB bands by turning the control dial.
When using the remote controller
Directly select the preset number.
Using the Standby Receptions
TA (Road Traffic News) Standby
Reception
• Operations are exactly the same as explained on page 11 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot activate TA Standby Reception separately for the DAB tuner and for FM tuner.
• The volume changes to the preset TA volume level (see page 24).
PTY Standby Reception
• Operations are exactly the same as explained on page 11 for FM RDS stations.
• PTY Standby Reception for DAB tuner works only using a dynamic PTY code.
• You can neither store your favorite PTY nor activate PTY Standby Reception separately for the DAB tuner and for the FM tuner.
• You can activate and deactivate PTY Standby
Reception when the source is either “FM” or
“DAB.”
Announcement Standby Reception
Announcement Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite service (announcement type).
To select your favorite announcement type,
see page 24.
Announcement types
Travel, Warning, News, Weather, Event, Special, Rad Inf
(Radio Information), Sports, Finance
To activate the Announcement Standby
Reception
1
Enter the MODE menu (see page 4).
2
Select “Announce.”
Continued on the next page
31
32
3
4
Select an announce type.
Finish the procedure.
When shipped from the factory, Alternative
Frequency Reception is activated.
To deactivate the Alternative Frequency
Reception,
see page 24.
To show the Dynamic Label Segment (DLS) information
• If the ANN indicator lights up,
Announcement Standby Reception is activated.
• If the ANN indicator flashes,
Announcement Standby Reception is not yet activated.
To activate, tune in to another service providing these signals. The ANN indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.
To deactivate the Announcement Standby
Reception
Select “Off” in step
3
above.
• The ANN indicator goes off.
Lights up when receiving a service providing DLS.
Tracing the same programme—
Alternative Frequency Reception
You can keep listening to the same programme by activating the Alternative Frequency
Reception.
•
While receiving a DAB service:
When driving in an area where a DAB service cannot be received, this unit automatically tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS station, broadcasting the same programme.
•
While receiving an FM RDS station:
When driving in an area where a DAB service is broadcasting the same programme as the
FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit automatically tunes in to the DAB service.
Back to the beginning
• The DLS screen will be temporarily canceled when you operate the unit.
Other external component operations
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN plugs on the rear or to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input
Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input
Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
For listening to the SD card/USB memory, see pages 14 – 17; For iPod, or D.player, see pages
27 – 29.
~
LINE-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
LINE IN plugs.
EXT-IN :
For selecting the external component connected to the
CD changer jack.
If “EXT-IN” does not appear, see page 25 and select the external input (“Ext In”).
Ÿ
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
!
Adjust the volume.
⁄
Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 18 – 22.)
Connector
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its case,
press down the center holder of the case and lift the disc out, holding it by the edges.
Center holder
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case,
gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
Continued on the next page
33
34
To keep discs clean
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
How to handle SD card
SD cards are precision products. DO NOT impact, bend, drop, or wet them.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Stick-on label
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.
FM RDS operations
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme
Identification) and AF (Alternative
Frequency) to work correctly. Without receiving these data correctly, Network-
Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by
TA Standby Reception, the volume level automatically changes to the preset level (TA
VOL) if the current level is lower than the preset level.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated (with AF selected), Network-
Tracking Reception is also activated automatically. On the other hand, Network-
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated without deactivating Alternative Frequency
Reception. (See page 24.)
• Message service requires the RDS Radiotext signal. It is available on most major stations.
If reception is weak, the service may become unavailable. For any questions regarding the content of this service, please contact your broadcaster.
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
«http://www.rds.org.uk».
Disc/SD card/USB memory operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA format; MP3/WMA files recorded in an SD card or a USB memory.
• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been assigned to the audio CD (see page 26), it will be shown on the display.
• While fast-forwarding or reversing an MP3/
WMA track, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down, the control panel moves down, and the disc automatically ejects from the loading slot.
• If you keep the control panel open for about
1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep” setting is turned “On”—see page 25) the control panel returns to its previous position.
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with “Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.
Playing an MP3/WMA discs
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,
1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files compliant to ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name.
• The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
Continued on the next page
35
36
– Romeo * : up to 128 (72) characters
– Joliet * : up to 64 (36) characters
– Windows long file name * : up to 128 (72) characters
*
The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is
313 or more.
• This unit can play back the files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriated format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from an SD card or a
USB memory
• While playing from an SD card or a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some
SD cards or USB memories due to their characteristics or recording conditions.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing some buttons on the control panel.
• If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, “No Files” appears and the unit returns to the previous source.
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in
VBR (variable bit rate).
• For SD card: The maximum number of characters for folder name is 8 characters; file names is 12 characters. This unit cannot recognize folder with period (.) on the folder name.
For USB memory: The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.
• For SD card: This unit can recognize a total of
255 files and 63 folders.
For USB memory: This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not constant.
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)
Sound adjustments
Selecting the DSP modes—DSP
• Effectiveness of “V.Cancel” depends on the recording condition of the sources:
– Monaural sources such as AM and monaural FM broadcasting programs.
– Multiplex sound sources.
– Sources recorded with duets, strong echo, a chorus, or only a few instruments.
• When “4ch” is selected, rear speakers are used only to reproduce reflections and reverberations in order to creates a beingthere feeling in your car compartment.
• If fader or balance has been set close to its extreme, appropriate effect may not be obtained.
• You cannot adjust the effect level and speaker number when “Defeat” is selected with crossover network activated.
Storing your own sound modes
• If you do not want to store your current adjustment, but only to apply the adjustment to the current playback source, press
MENU to go back to the operation screen of the current source. Adjustment you made remains effective until you select a sound mode.
Setting the sound modes—SEL
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to the center.
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.
• You cannot change the input level—
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If the source is FM, “Fix” will appear when you try to adjust it.
General settings — PSM
• “Auto Dimmer” may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any one other than
“Auto.”
• If you change the “Amp Gain” setting from
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” while the volume level is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 discs, “Name Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc in the unit and vise versa.
iPod® or D. player operations
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
D. player is charged through this unit.
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all operations from the iPod or D. player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or
D. player and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than
16 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 23). This unit can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:
For iPod users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>
For D. player users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>
DAB tuner operations
• Only primary DAB services can be presetted even when you store a secondary service.
• A previously preset DAB service is erased when a new DAB service is stored in the same preset number.
Continued on the next page
37
38
Preset frequency level settings for each sound mode
Preset equalizing value
Sound mode
63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12.5 kHz
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
00
00
00
+04
00 00
+06 +04 +04 +04
+02 00
00
+06 +06 +04 +0200
00
00
00
00
00 00 00
+02+04 +02
+02+02+02+06
+02+02+02+04
+06 +04 +02+02+02+02+02+06 +04
+08 +04 +0200 –04 –0200 +02+02
+04 +0200
+06 +0200
00
00
00 00
+02+04
00
+04
+02+04
+04 +06
Classic
User 1
+04 +06 +04 +0200
00 00 00 00 00
User 200
User 3 00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
+02+04
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “Connect Error” appears on the display.
• “Push Reset” appears on the display and the control panel movement is freezed.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “No Text” appears on the display.
• “Loading” does not disappear.
Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Remove the control panel, wipe the connector, then attach it again (see pages 4 and 33).
Reset the unit (see page 2). If this does not work, check the installation.
Store stations manually.
Connect the aerial firmly.
The station does not support RDS RT or the reception is weak.
Check the Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13).
The receiving signal is temporarily too weak to receive a complete message although the service is available.
Check the Network-Tracking Reception (see page 13).
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for recording.
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected.
• Unlock the disc (see page 17).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Disc,” “Loading
Error,” or “Eject Error” appears).
Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Noise is generated.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders. • A longer readout time is required (“File
Check” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have intended them to play.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “No Music” appears on the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
This sometimes occurs while playing. This is caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA track.
Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 26).
Continued on the next page
39
40
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Noise is generated.
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the display.
• “No Files” appears on the display.
• “SD Loading Error” appears on the display while playing tracks from an SD card.
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes interrupted.
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• Readout time varies depending on the device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
Play a device that contains tracks encoded in an appropriate format.
The track is unplayable.
• “Not Support” appears on the display and track skips.
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, then returns to the previous source.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g. album name).
• The device may be malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted correctly.
The files included in the device are corrupted.
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the display.
Detach the control panel and reinsert the SD card. The control panel goes back to initial position (Angle 1).
MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into the device.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the device, and try again.
This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z, small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols and special characters (see page 26).
Insert a disc into the magazine.
• “No Disc” appears on the display.
• “No Magazine” appears on the display.
Insert the magazine.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press the reset button of the CD changer.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• DSP mode cannot be selected other modes than “Defeat.”
• Only high range sound or low range sound is reproduced though full range speakers are connected.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Deactivate crossover network (see page 21).
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• The iPod or D. player does not turn on or does not work.
• Buttons do not work as intended.
• The sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display.
• Playback stops.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
The functions of the buttons have been changed. Press
POWER/ATT/ENTER before performing the operation.
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod/
D. player.
Check the connecting cable and its connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart the playback operation using the control panel (see page
28).
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard when connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard.
• “ERROR 01” appears on the display when connecting a D. player.
• “No Files” or “No Track” appears on the display.
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then, connect it again.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or D. player.
• “Reset 1” – “Reset 7” appears on the display.
Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and iPod/
D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do not work after disconnecting from this unit.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod or D. player.
• “No DAB Signal” appears on the display.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display.
• The DAB tuner does not work at all.
Search for another ensemble.
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly and reset the unit (see page 2).
Reset the unit (see page 2).
• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the display.
Check the DAB aerial and its connections.
•
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
SD logo is a trademark.
•
Manufactured under license from BBE Sound, Inc.
Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP5510752 and 5736897. BBE and BBE symbol are registered trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc.
•
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
41
42
Specifications
Maximum Power
Output:
Continuous Power
Output (RMS):
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control
Range:
Other Terminals:
Frequencies:
Graphic EQ: 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12.5 kHz
(9 bands)
Parametric EQ: 3 bands (Band 1/2/3): 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 31.5 Hz, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 63 Hz, 80 Hz,
100 Hz, 125 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz, 250 Hz, 315 Hz, 400 Hz, 500 Hz, 630 Hz, 800 Hz, 1 kHz,
1.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
16 kHz, 20 kHz (31 frequencies)
Level: ±10 dB
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Frequency Response:
Signal to Noise Ratio:
Level/Impedance: Line-In:
Line-Out:
Output Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
70 dB
1.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
LINE IN, CD changer
Frequency Range:
FM Tuner
MW Tuner
FM:
AM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
30 dB
20 μV/65 dB
LW Tuner Sensitivity: 50 μV
Type: Compact disc player
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
Frequency Response:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
102 dB
Wow and Flutter:
MP3:
WMA:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Less than measurable limit
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 320 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
MP3:
WMA:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
FAT 12/16
8 MB – 512 MB
MP3/WMA
8 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 33 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
8 kbps – 192 kbps
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
Format:
Storage:
Playable Audio Format:
Max. Current:
MP3:
WMA:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
Bit Rate:
Sampling Frequency:
FAT 12/16/32
Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
MP3/WMA
Less than 500 mA
32 kbps – 320 kbps
MPEG-1: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
MPEG-2: 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz
MPEG-2.5: 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
5 kbps – 320 kbps
8 kHz – 48 kHz
Power Requirement:
Grounding System:
Operating Voltage:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):
Panel Size (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
0°C to +40°C
182 mm × 52 mm × 162 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
1.7 k g (excluding accessories)
43
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts
Затруднения при эксплуатации?
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на соответствующую страницу
EN, GE, RU
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0106DTSMDTJEIN
GET0366-013A
[EY]
KD-SH1000
Installation/Connection Manual
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung
Руководство по установке/подключению
ENGLISH
This unit is designed to operate on
12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems
. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
0106DTSMDTJEIN
EN, GE, RU
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
DEUTSCH РУССКИЙ
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in
elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V
Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt
. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht
über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на
12 В постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе
. Если Ваш автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
WARNUNGEN
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.
•
Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des
Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем
Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.
•
После установки обязательно заземлите данное устройство на шасси автомобиля.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of
4
Ω
to 8
Ω ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Hinweise:
•
Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.
Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC
Autoradiohändler.
•
Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit einer Impedanz von
4
Ω
bis 8
Ω
). Wenn die Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „Amp Gain“ anders ein, um
Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 25 der
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
•
Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband umwickeln.
•
Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.
Примечания:
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели устройства, с полным сопротивлением от
4
Ω
до 8
Ω). Если максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в режим “Amp Gain”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 25).
• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте
НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.
Heat sink
Abstrahlblech
Радиатор
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:
• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der
Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer beschädigt wird.
•
VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die
Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и подключению громкоговорителей:
• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет повреждено.
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß
Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.
Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC-
Autoradiohändler.
A / B
Hard case/Control panel
Etui/Schalttafel
Жесткий футляр/панель управления
C
Sleeve
Halterung
Муфта
Список деталей для установки и подключения
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.
При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.
D
Trim plate
Frontrahmen
Декоративную панель
E
Power cord
Stromkable
Кабель питания
I
Rubber cushion
Gummipuffer
Резиновый чехол
F
Washer (ø5)
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)
Шайба (њ5)
J
Handles
Griffe
Рычаги
G
Lock nut (M5)
Sicherungsmutter (M5)
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)
1
K
Remote controller
Fernbedienung
диcтaнциoннoго yпpaвлeния
H
Mounting bolt (M5
×
20 mm)
Befestigungsschraube (M5
×
20 mm)
Крепежный болт (M5
×
20 мм)
L
Battery
Batterie
Бaтapeйкa
INSTALLATION
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
EINBAU
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen
Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler oder ein
Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze vertreibt.
•
Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen
Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)
На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка. Если у
Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие принадлежности.
• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.
Do the required electrical connections.
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen
Anschlüsse vor.
Выполните необходимые подключения контактов, как показано на оборотной стороне этой инструкции.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.
Отогните соответствующие фиксаторы, предназначенные для прочной установки корпуса.
* 1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
* 1
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die Sicherung auf der Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.
* 1 Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить предохранитель, расположенный сзади.
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Ausbau des Geräts
* 2 Fit the protrusions outside the receiver.
* 2
Die Vorsprünge außen am Receiver anpassen.
* 2 Выступы должны находиться с внешней стороны приемника.
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.
Удаление устройства
Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät entfernt werden kann.
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der Anker-Option / При использовании дополнительной стойки
Dashboard
Armaturenbrett
Приборная панель
Fire wall
Feuerwand
Стена
Stay (option)
Anker (Option)
Стойка
(дополнительно)
Screw (option)
Schraube (Option)
Винт (дополнительно)
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von weniger als 30˚ auf.
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne
Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
In einem Toyota-Automobil z.B. bauen Sie zuerst das Autoradio aus und installieren dann das Gerät an seiner Stelle.
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm)
* 3
Senkkopfschrauben (M5
×
8 mm)
* 3
Крепежные винты (M5
×
8 мм)
* 3
* 3 Not supplied for this unit.
* 3
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
* 3 Hе входит в комплект поставки.
Bracket
* 3
Konsole
* 3
Кронштейн
* 3
Flat type screws (M5
×
8 mm)
* 3
Senkkopfschrauben (M5
×
8 mm)
* 3
Крепежные винты (M5
×
8 мм)
* 3
Taschen
Карман
Bracket
* 3
Konsole
* 3
Кронштейн
* 3
Note :
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Hinweis :
Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden. Werden längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.
Примечание :
При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.
Caution when installing / Vorsicht bei der Installation / Предостережение во время установки
Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve by using four corners of the trim plate.
• DO NOT press the panel (shaded in the illustration).
Setzen Sie den Receiver in die Montagemanschette, indem Sie die vier Ecken der Deckplatte verwenden.
•
Drücken Sie NICHT auf die Platte selber (in der Abbildung schraffiert).
Поместите приемник в монтажную панель, используя четыре угла лицевой панели.
• НЕ нажимайте на панель (затемнена на рисунке).
2
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ
A
If your car is equipped with the ISO connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem
ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
•
Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.
A
C
E
G
F
H
B
D
From the car body
Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie
От корпуса автомобиля
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel-
(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
•
Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.
Original wiring /
Original verdrahtung
/
Исходная схема соединений
Modified wiring
1
/
Modifizierte Verdrahtung
1
/
Преобразованная схема соединений
1
I
K
M
O
J
L
N
P
ISO connector of the supplied power cord
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в комплект поставки
ISO connector
ISO-Steckverbinder
Разъем ISO
Use modified wiring
2
if the unit does not turn on.
Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung
2
wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.
Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему соединений
2
.
Modified wiring 2 /
Modifizierte Verdrahtung
2 /
Преобразованная схема соединений 2
View from the lead side
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen
Вид со стороны выводов
Y: Yellow
Gelb
Желтый
R: Red
Rot
Красный
* Choke coil
*
Drosselspule
* Дроссельная катушка
B Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Подключение без использования разъемов ISO
Before connecting:
Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1
Cut the ISO connector.
2
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
3
Connect the aerial cord.
4
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Vor dem Anschließen:
Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig überprüfen.
Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät hervorrufen.
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug können sich farblich unterscheiden.
1
Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.
2
Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.
3
Das Antennenkabel anschließen.
4
Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.
Перед началом подключений:
Тщательно проверьте проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.
Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.
1
Обрежьте разъем ISO.
2
Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном ниже порядке.
3
Подключите кабель антенны.
4
В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к устройству.
If you have installed 3-way network speaker system in your car,
see diagram for speaker connection.
Wenn Sie eine 3-Wege-Lautsprecheranlage in Ihrem Fahrzeug eingebaut haben,
siehe Zeichnung zum Lautsprecheranschluss.
Если в автомобиле установлена трехполосная система динамиков,
схему подключения динамиков см. на диаграмме .
To subwoofer (see diagram )
An Subwoofer
(siehe Schaltplan )
К низкочастотному динамику
(см. схему )
Aerial connector
Antennenanschluss
Разъем антенны
Rear ground terminal
Hintere Erdungsc-anschlußklemme
Задний разъем заземления
Line out (see diagram )
Schutz kappen Signalausgang
(siehe Schaltplan )
К выходу (см. схему )
To external components (see diagram )
An externe Komponenten (siehe Schaltplan )
К внешним устройствам (см. схему )
*
4
Not supplied for this unit.
*
4
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
*
4
Не входит в комплект поставки.
*
5
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.
*
5
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst die Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.
* 5 Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод, иначе питание не включится.
LINE IN
(see diagram /
siehe Schaltplan /
см. схему )
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram )
An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan )
К рулевому пульту дистанционного управления
(см. схему )
15 A fuse
15 A Sicherung
Предохранитель 15 A
Black
Schwarz
Черный
Ignition switch
Zündschalter
Переключатель зажигания
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
Yellow
* 5
Gelb
Red
Rot
* 5
Желтый
* 5
Красный
Blue with white stripe
Blau mit weißem Streifen
Синий с белой полосой
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)
(постоянный 12 В)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя
Fuse block
Sicherungsblock
Блок предохранителя
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)
Orange with white stripe
Orange mit weißem Streifen
Оранжевый с белой полосой
To car light control switch
Zum Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-Schalter
К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля
Brown
Braun
Коричневый
To cellular phone system
An Mobiltelefonsystem
К мобильной телефонной системе
White with black stripe
Weiß mit schwarzem
Streifen
Белый с черной полосой
White
Weiß
Белый
Gray with black stripe
Grau mit schwarzem
Streifen
Серый с черной
Left speaker (front)
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)
Левый громкоговоритель
(передний) полосой
Gray
Grau
Серый
Green with black stripe
Grün mit schwarzem
Streifen
Зеленый с черной
Right speaker (front)
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)
Правый громкоговоритель
(передний) полосой
3
Green
Grün
Зеленый
Purple with black stripe
Lila mit schwarzem
Streifen
Пурпурный с черной
Left speaker (rear)
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)
Левый громкоговоритель
(задний) полосой
Purple
Lila
Пурпурный
Right speaker (rear)
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)
Правый громкоговоритель
(задний)
ENGLISH DEUTSCH РУССКИЙ
C
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Подключение к рулевому пульту дистанционного управления
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the controller. To do it, a JVC’s
OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required. Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.
Steering wheel remote input
Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung
Вход рулевого пульта дистанционного управления
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver steuern. Hierfür ist ein für Ihr
Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von
JVC (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere
Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.
Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом дистанционного управления, его можно использовать для управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим адаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления JVC
OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего автомобиля.
За более подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику
OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten)
Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления OE (не поставляется) автомобильных аудиосистем компании JVC.
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)
Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления (устанавливаемый в автомобиле)
D
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer усилителей и/или низкочастотного динамика
/
Anschließen der externen Verstärker und/oder Subwoofer
/
Подключение внешних
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.
• For amplifier only:
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit (see page 25 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit.
Sie können Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu erweitern.
•
Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses Gerät gesteuert werden kann.
• Nur für den Verstärker:
– Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am
Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses
Geräts unbenutzt lassen.
– Sie können den eingebauten Verstärker abschalten und die
Audiosignale nur zu dem(n) externen Verstärker(n) ausgeben, um scharfen Ton zu erhalten und Hitzestau im Unit zu vermeiden (siehe
Seite 25 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
– Der Ausgangspegel dieses Geräts wird auf einem hohen Wert gehalten, um den Hifi-Klang zu unterstützen, den dieses Gerät reproduziert.
Wenn Sie einen externen Verstärker an dieses Gerät anschließen, stellen Sie den Verstärkungsregler des externen Verstärkers herunter, um die bestmögliche Leistung dieses Geräts zu erzielen.
Remote lead
Fernbedienungsleitung
Провод внешнего устройства
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)
Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной стереосистемы.
• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.
•
Только для усилителя:
–
Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте провода громкоговорителей данного устройства неиспользованными.
– Для получения более чистого звука и предотвращения внутреннего перегрева приемника можно отключить встроенный усилитель и использовать для усиления аудиосигнала только внешние усилители (см. стр. 25
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ).
– Уровень выходного сигнала линии данного устройства поддерживается высоким, чтобы обеспечить высококачественный звук, воспроизводимый данным устройством.
При подключении внешнего усилителя к данному устройству убавьте регулировку усиления на внешнем усилителе, чтобы обеспечить оптимальные характеристики работы данного устройства.
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)
Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC-усилитель
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Низкочастотный динамик
Rear speakers
Hintere Lautsprecher
Задние громкоговорители
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC-усилитель
Front speakers
Vordere Lautsprecher
Передние громкоговорители
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC-усилитель
Rear speakers
Hintere Lautsprecher
Задние громкоговорители
Front speakers (see diagram )
Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan )
Передние громкоговорители (см. схему )
*
*
1
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
1
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.
* 1 Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской (если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как прикреплять провод).
Невыполнение этого требования может привести к повреждению данного устройства.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
*
2
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them to the amplifier.
*
2
Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des
ISO-Steckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen diese an den Verstärker an.
* 2 Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей разъема ISO и подсоеди ните их к усилителю.
*
3
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
* 3
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
*
3
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)
FEHLERSUCHE
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.
*
Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.
*
Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?
• Ton verzerrt.
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
*
Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?
• Störgeräusche im Klang.
*
Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?
• Gerät wird heiß.
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
*
Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.
*
Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?
4
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ
• Сработал предохранитель.
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?
• Питание не включается.
* Подключен ли желтый провод?
• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода громкоговорителей?
• Звук искажен.
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?
• Шум мешает звучанию.
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?
• Устройство нагревается.
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?
• Приемник не работает.
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?
E
Speaker connections for 3-way network speaker system / Lautsprecheranschlüsse für die 3-Wege-Lautsprecheranlage / Схема подключения динамиков для трехполосной системы динамиков
You can enjoy a world of “pure audio” in your car by connecting 3way network speaker system (high-range/mid-range/subwoofer).
Sie können eine Welt des “reinen Tons” in Ihrem Fahrzeug genießen, wenn Sie eine 3-Wege-Lautsprecheranlage (Hochtöner/Mitteltöner/
Subwoofer) anschließen.
Чтобы в полной мере насладиться миром “чистого звука” в автомобиле, подключите трехполосную систему динамиков
(высоко-, средне- и низкочастотные динамики).
IMPORTANT:
If you have installed the 3-way network speaker system in the car, make sure of the following.
• Connect the speaker system as illustrated below.
• Before using the system, activate crossover network and preset the appropriate cutoff frequencies for HPF/LPF
(especially for HPF); otherwise, it may damage the speakers.
• For details about the setting, see pages 21 and 22 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.
WICHTIG:
Wenn Sie eine 3-Wege-Lautsprecheranlage im Fahrzeug eingebaut haben, überprüfen Sie Folgendes.
• Schließen Sie die Lautsprecheranlage an, wie unten gezeigt.
• Vor der Verwendung der Anlage aktivieren Sie das Crossover-
Netz und stellen die geeigneten Schwellenfrequenzen für HPF/LPF
(besonders für HPF) ein; andernfalls können die Lautsprecher beschädigt werden.
• Einzelheiten zur Einstellung siehe Seite 21 und 22 der
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.
ВАЖНО:
Если в автомобиле установлена трехполосная система динамиков, выполните следующие настройки.
• Подключите систему динамиков, как показано на рисунке ниже.
• Перед использованием системы активируйте разделительный фильтр и установите предельные значения для самых высоких и низких частот HPF/LPF (особенно для высоких – HPF); в противном случае возможно повреждение динамиков.
• Подробную информацию о настройках см. на страницах
21 и 22 ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ.
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the speaker output
Bei Anschließen der Lautsprecher (Hochtöner/Mitteltöner) über den Lautsprecherausgang
При подключении динамиков (высокого или среднего диапазона) через выход динамиков
Left high-range speaker
Linker Hochtöner
Левый динамик высокого диапазона
Left mid-range speaker
Linker Mitteltöner
Левый динамик среднего диапазона
White
Weiß
Белый
White with black stripe
Weiß mit schwarzem Streifen
Белый с черной полосой
Green
Grün
Зеленый
Green with black stripe
Grün mit schwarzem Streifen
Зеленый с черной полосо
Gray
Grau
Серый
Gray with black stripe
Grau mit schwarzem Streifen
Серый с черной полосой
Purple
Lila
Пурпурный
Purple with black stripe
Lila mit schwarzem Streifen
Пурпурный с черной полосой
Right high-range speaker
Rechter Hochtöner
Правый динамик высокого диапазона
Right mid-range speaker
Rechter Mitteltöner
Правый динамик среднего диапазона
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)
Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)
Connecting subwoofer / Anschließen des Subwoofers / Подключение низкочастотного динамика
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-Anschluß (für diesen Unit nicht mitgeliefert)
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект)
To subwoofer out
Zum Subwoofer-Ausgang
К выходу низкочастотного динамика
When connecting the speakers (high-range/mid-range) through the external amplifiers—to obtain more powerful sound
Beim Anschließen der Lautsprecher (Hochtöner/Mitteltöner) über die externen Verstärker—für kräftigeren Klang
При подключении динамиков (высокого или среднего диапазона частот) через внешние усилители—для получения более мощного звука
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC-усилитель
To LINE OUT (REAR)
Zu LINE OUT (REAR)
К разъему LINE OUT (REAR)
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC-усилитель
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC-усилитель
To LINE OUT (FRONT)
Zu LINE OUT (FRONT)
К разъему LINE OUT (FRONT)
Remote lead
Fernbedienungsleitung
Провод внешнего устройства
Left high-range speaker
Linker Hochtöner
Левый динамик высокого диапазона
Right high-range speaker
Rechter Hochtöner
Правый динамик высокого диапазона
Left mid-range speaker
Linker Mitteltöner
Левый динамик среднего диапазона
Right mid-range speaker
Rechter Mitteltöner
Правый динамик среднего диапазона
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Низкочастотный динамик
*
4
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching
* the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
4
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen
*
Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.
4
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской (если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может привести к повреждению данного устройства.
*
5
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*
5
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
*
5
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)
5
F
Connecting the external components / Anschließen der externen Komponenten / Подключение внешних устройств
CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod ® , or JVC D. player / CD-Wechsler, DAB-Tuner, Apple iPod ® oder JVC D. Player / Устройство автоматической смены компакт-дисков, тюнер DAB, Apple iPod ® или проигрыватель JVC D.
•
Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „Changer“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 25 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) /
Установите для внешнего входа значение “Changer” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 25.)
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below.
The iPod * 6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter
(not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).
Sie können diese Komponenten in Reihe anschließen, wie in der
Abbildung unten gezeigt. Der iPod
* 6
oder D. Player kann mit einem
Schnittstellenadapter angeschlossen werden (nicht mitgeliefert)—
KS-PD100 (für iPod) oder KS-PD500 (für D. Player).
Эти внешние устройства можно подключать параллельно, как показано на рисунке. Проигрыватель iPod* 6 или D. можно подключить с помощью интерфейсного адаптера (не входит в комплект поставки)—KS-PD100 (для iPod) или KS-PD500 (для проигрывателя D.).
CAUTION / ACHTUNG / ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
•
•
Vor dem Anschließen der externen Komponenten sicherstellen, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.
Перед подключением внешних компонентов убедитесь в том, что устройство выключено.
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Anschluss 1 (integrierter Anschluss) / Соединение 1 (интегрированное соединение)
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)
Apple iPod (продается отдельно) or
oder
или
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC D. Player (getrennt gekauft)
Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)
JVC DAB tuner
DAB-Tuner von JVC
Тюнер DAB JVC
JVC CD changer
CD-Wechsler von JVC
Устройство автоматической смены компакт-дисков JVC
CD changer jack /
Buchse für CD-Wechsler
/
Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Anschluss 2 (alternativer Anschluss) / Соединение 2 (альтернативное соединение)
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)
Apple iPod (продается отдельно) or
oder
или
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC D. Player (getrennt gekauft)
Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)
JVC DAB tuner
DAB-Tuner von JVC
Тюнер DAB JVC
JVC CD changer
CD-Wechsler von JVC
Устройство автоматической смены компакт-дисков JVC
CD changer jack /
Buchse für CD-Wechsler
/
Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков
*
6 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
*
6
iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Computer, Inc., eingetragen in den USA und anderen Ländern.
*
6 iPod является торговой маркой Apple Computer, Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других странах.
* 7 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or DAB tuner
* 7
Anschließen des für CD-Wechsler oder DAB-Tuner mitgelieferten Kabels
* 7 Подключение кабеля, входящего в комплект поставки устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков или тюнера DAB
Other external component / Andere externe Komponenten / Другое внешнее устройство
•
Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 25 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „Ext In“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 25 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) / Установите для внешнего входа значение “Ext In” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 25.)
External component
Externe Komponente
Внешнее устройство
CD changer jack
Buchse für CD-Wechsler
Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков
External component
Externe Komponente
Внешнее устройство
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
3,5-mm-Stereo-Ministecker
Мини-разъем стерео-3,5 мм
External component
Externe Komponente
Внешнее устройство
*
8
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
*
8
Line-Eingangsadapter KS-U57 (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
*
8
Коммуникационный адаптер KS-U57 (не входит в комплект поставки)
* 9
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
*
9
AUX-Eingangsadapter KS-U58 (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
*
9
Адаптер для подключения дополнительных устройств KS-U58
(не входит в комплект поставки)
6
*
10
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*
10
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
*
10
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)
advertisement
Key Features
- Built-in CD player and external CD changer connectivity
- SD card and USB memory playback
- Built-in AM/FM tuner
- 50 watts x 4 channel amplifier
- DSP modes for customizable sound
- EQ for fine-tuning the sound
- Crossover network for optimizing speaker performance
Related manuals
Frequently Answers and Questions
How do I detach the control panel?
How do I change the display?
How do I reset my unit?
advertisement
Table of contents
- 5 Control panel
- 7 Getting started
- 7 Basic operations
- 8 Radio operations
- 11 operations
- 11 Playing a disc in the unit
- 11 Playing discs in the CD changer
- 11 Playing from an SD card
- 12 Playing from a USB memory
- 15 Sound adjustments
- 15 Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
- 16 Using the equalizer—EQ
- 18 Activating crossover network
- 18 Setting the sound modes—SEL
- 20 General settings — PSM
- 24 Title assignment
- 25 Satellite radio operations
- 29 iPod®/D. player operations
- 31 Other external component operations
- 31 Maintenance
- 32 More about this unit
- 38 Troubleshooting
- 42 Specifications
- 55 Control panel
- 57 Getting started
- 57 Basic operations
- 58 Radio operations
- 61 operations
- 61 Playing a disc in the unit
- 61 Playing discs in the CD changer
- 61 Playing from an SD card
- 62 Playing from a USB memory
- 65 Sound adjustments
- 65 Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
- 66 Using the equalizer—EQ
- 68 Activating crossover network
- 68 Setting the sound modes—SEL
- 70 General settings — PSM
- 73 Title assignment
- 74 iPod®/D. player operations
- 76 Other external component operations
- 76 Maintenance
- 77 More about this unit
- 82 Troubleshooting
- 86 Specifications
- 99 Control panel
- 101 Getting started
- 101 Basic operations
- 102 Radio operations
- 105 operations
- 105 Playing a disc in the unit
- 105 Playing discs in the CD changer
- 105 Playing from an SD card
- 106 Playing from a USB memory
- 109 Sound adjustments
- 109 Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
- 110 Using the equalizer—EQ
- 112 Activating crossover network
- 112 Setting the sound modes—SEL
- 114 General settings — PSM
- 117 Title assignment
- 118 iPod®/D. player operations
- 120 Other external component operations
- 120 Maintenance
- 121 More about this unit
- 126 Troubleshooting
- 130 Specifications
- 143 Control panel
- 145 Getting started
- 145 Basic operations
- 146 Radio operations
- 149 operations
- 149 Playing a disc in the unit
- 149 Playing discs in the CD changer
- 149 Playing from an SD card
- 150 Playing from a USB memory
- 153 Sound adjustments
- 153 Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
- 154 Using the equalizer—EQ
- 156 Activating crossover network
- 156 Setting the sound modes—SEL
- 158 General settings — PSM
- 161 Title assignment
- 162 iPod®/D. player operations
- 164 Other external component operations
- 164 Maintenance
- 165 More about this unit
- 170 Troubleshooting
- 174 Specifications
- 187 Control panel
- 189 Getting started
- 189 Basic operations
- 190 Radio operations
- 193 FM RDS operations
- 193 programme
- 196 operations
- 196 Playing a disc in the unit
- 196 Playing discs in the CD changer
- 196 Playing from an SD card
- 197 Playing from a USB memory
- 200 Sound adjustments
- 200 Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
- 201 Using the equalizer—EQ
- 203 Activating crossover network
- 203 Setting the sound modes—SEL
- 205 General settings — PSM
- 208 Title assignment
- 209 iPod®/D. player operations
- 211 DAB tuner operations
- 215 Other external component operations
- 215 Maintenance
- 216 More about this unit
- 220 Troubleshooting
- 224 Specifications
- 237 Control panel
- 239 Getting started
- 239 Basic operations
- 240 Radio operations
- 243 FM RDS operations
- 243 programme
- 246 operations
- 246 Playing a disc in the unit
- 246 Playing discs in the CD changer
- 246 Playing from an SD card
- 247 Playing from a USB memory
- 250 Sound adjustments
- 250 Selecting the DSP modes (DSP)
- 251 Using the equalizer—EQ
- 253 Activating crossover network
- 253 Setting the sound modes—SEL
- 255 General settings — PSM
- 258 Title assignment
- 259 iPod®/D. player operations
- 261 DAB tuner operations
- 265 Other external component operations
- 265 Maintenance
- 266 More about this unit
- 270 Troubleshooting
- 274 Specifications